《Wolf's Cry》


 Chapter 01 - Being Part of Kali

    CHAPTER 1 ¨C Being part of Kali¡¯s


    I always thought less of myself than what my real potential was. Until that day, until that moment. What changed, I still do not know, but something did and the monster, that I am now, was born. I died that moment, not physically but mentally and I was reborn or reincarnated as I might paraphrase.


    I was born and raised in mountains of Kastiff. The tribe which I belong to boasts about our history of 1500 years in the mountains of Kastiffs. The biggest tribe with the oldest history in our region, The Kali''s. The name Kali originates from the nomad elder of our tribe who emigrated with some 200 warriors from the land of Tat''s to the west, by pillaging villages all the way to the south of lake Kasp and establishing his own tribe in the Kastiff mountains some millennia and half ago. To tell the truth, I do not believe and I do not care about that version of the history. What I know is we were the biggest and most influential tribe in the region. Nobody would dare to mess around with us except wolves. I hate wolves. Nobody likes them. Those wild animals which would attack sheep and shepherds and kill anybody and everything. You can tame a lion or tiger but not a wolf. It just does not like to take orders. You could tame a tiger and make it jump over stools and stand on them (our tribe elder had one tiger tamed to do stuff like that for his amusement, and I have seen that) but not a wolf. Many have tried, but no successful result as of now, you would say it¡¯s empirically tested. Moreover they are greedy. They will eat just one sheep and kill all the stock. God, I hate them.


    Anyway, I am about to tell you about my past as a young shepherd and who I became after some trials and tribulations. What I am about to write down is no fiction but truth. By the way, I still do not like wolves. Even though they like me now very much. Haha¡­


    I was a na?ve kid. Too na?ve and pure to understand what was happening around me all my life. It was because of my mother. She was too overprotective.  So from present perspective I think that God(s) have favored me as there is no other explanation why I am who I am now. My father was an idealist but a coward. No shame in it, he was who he is. It the choices what you make that make you who you are. He had made his choice back in his time. I do not want to talk about him as I have this hatred towards him which I cannot stuff into words. A coward who had accomplished few things got married and screwed his life by becoming a heave binge drinker after giving up on life. Nobody knew about his cowardice expect me, mother and my sister. He was known all around as a well-educated man who drinks a bit more than everybody else. But I knew he was a coward. I knew because he was showing his true colors after he was coming back to home and beginning to backtalk about our close relatives and their success in trade or government posts. How he was a `great` man that had to accomplish the peace but could not because none of the close relatives supported him (his ideas). Screw him. I knew the moment I get to know myself that one day I would kill him.


    In contrast, my mother was all what my father would need to become a man. She was smart.


    She knew how to accumulate wealth by means of trade. She knew how to command people. Nevertheless, she was a woman. A kind woman. A na?ve one nonetheless. The only thing my mother and father shared in common was their innocence in matters of worldly business. My father was a hopeless in that matter as for him money did not have value. My mother knew that without gold, silver and money you would not go around. I assume my mother knew what she lacked. That¡¯s why she tried to nurture me and my sister to accomplish what they could not and to become what they were not. Because of their innocence they were misused by my aunts and uncles a lot. Relatives would borrow money from my parents but never give it back because they were ¡°poor¡± back in those times.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.On my 17th birthday King Dar died and was replaced by his son Hamil. Dar was a great warrior. He did a lot for our kingdom. Most of the Kastiff Mountains and its surrounding were conquered and ruled under our tribe. Dar was the man who became elder of our tribe when he was 30 years old. Our tribe was strong in matters of bravery and war but not so much in regards of agriculture, architecture and education. So this smart fella with big ambitions conquers all the land from west of Lake Kasp all the way to the south-west of Kastiff mountains and establishes the kingdom of Kali. Rich lands were acquired during his first 20 years of rule. He built the city of Mehm as the capital of the newfound kingdom on the shore of the lake Kasp. Protected the country¡¯s north border from the beast men by maintaining regular border patrol army. He was a legend and was almost worshipped by everybody. By the way, yours sincerely had personally met him. King Dar made sure that the amir¡¯s who ruled over the different regions of the newfound kingdom were from our tribe. Our tribe kind of had monopoly on political matters of kingdom, and everybody was happy with it.


    I was born on the west borders of Kingdom of Kali. Our neighbor¡¯s on the west were Elves. Never seen one. But I was told that they do not like us. Treated us as mutated living organisms who could not reach the level of Elves. I assumed they thought about us at the same level as bugs; after I met one, I was sure that they respect bugs more than humans.


    I remember a conversation with my father once upon a long time ago:


    [father] : you know kid.. (Pausing to drinking wine)


    [me] : yes?


    [father] : you know..(dumb facial expressions) the best woman ¡­to marry would ¡­.be an Elf with big.. (drains last bit of the wine bottle)


    [me] : with big?


    [father] : shut up ¡­ buy¡­.a bottle ¡­..wine ¡­shop. (and smashes to floor)


    As time passed by I knew why I hated him more than anybody else. Not because of his cowardice. Also it was one of the factors. It was because he did not respect himself. He would not care what he wore, what he ate or who he was. As much as he had something to drink at nights it was a good life for him. He did not deserve my mother. She was too good for him. If I was King Dar, the first thing before even establishing kingdom would be to kill my father. There was no single reason that could justify why he was alive.


    King Dar¡¯s ambitions brought way too many good things that actually corrupted our tribe. Great Kali¡¯s tribe became one which was obsessed with politics rather than war. Tribe was in a transition state where warriors became politicians, amirs or traders. We lost our touch I think. King Hamil¡¯s acquisition of throne was a proof of that. Until him, the tribe elder was selected by means of his or her (we had few but still we had few woman elders back in old days) wits. It was never passed from father to son. Tribe elder was always on the front lines when fighting the beast men of the north or demons of the south. The great Kali¡¯s nickname was the Dragon Slayer not because he had a throne to sit on but because he slayed a dragon when most lost their sanity after facing it.


    Anyway, a warrior is not decided by his or her height and weight. A warrior is decided when he faces the struggle face to face. Dying or killing is the end result. One side has to fade away into the darkness so that the other side reaches the glory. A warrior never backs away. Not a step (until 13 years old I took it literally as is).


    Next -  Chapter 02 - Wolf''s Cry</a>

 Chapter 02 - Wolfs Cry

    CHAPTER 2 ¨C Wolf¡¯s Cry


    Nobody I had met would ever give me the definition of who or what warrior is. They would always give me names or shout at me abstract ideas about it. Such as: A warrior never lies. A warrior must be brave. A warrior never steals. A warrior fights for justice. A warrior stands by weak. I could write a list of those axioms that could make few large books. I assume you could classify me as an idiot when I was a kid. I did believe in all that bullshit. Or was it bs?


    Anyway, what I would like you to understand is that warrior is not just a foot soldier. Warrior is the one who has accomplished something extraordinary so that tribe council could ask dwarfs to make magically enhanced weapons and armory just for him or her. Magician of 50 years could not stand a chance against a warrior from our tribe.


    Kali was a great man. He had made pact with dwarfs so that they make magically enhanced weapons and armors for the warriors of our tribe in exchange for their protection forever and ever. Tribe council was established so that they could refer chosen one to dwarfs and they could assess future warrior¡¯s mana affiliation and make proper weapon and armor for the future warrior. Easiest way to be selected for nomination was if you could beat the hell out of all the contestants in the annual Kali Tournament. I did not like the tournament idea. Not just because of my small statue and age. There were previous tournaments when contestants of my age had shown exemplary performance and given the chance to be accepted to Mehn Academy where they could improve on their skills and be promoted to be a warrior. It was just I did not like the idea of fighting against humans to acquire something even if it was being given a chance to be a warrior.


    As the experience increased by killing beast men or demons your weapon and armor improved, and at some point you could even face a dragon just as Kali did. Kali¡¯s greatest achievement and gift to our tribe was the pact with dwarfs. That made us the most fearsome human tribe in the world.


    My father¡¯s ancestor was a warrior from Kali¡¯s entourage. Unbeknownst to me, my mother originated directly from Kali. She was the last one. Her uncle had died in a fight with demons and never had kids. Her father lived a long life but had only her as a kid. Unintentionally, my avoidance of the tournament had its positive affects on my future. There were group of people who behind the curtains were planning to change the trajectory of the Kali tribe and kingdom in their favor. If I had been on top of that list or anywhere near it, I would not be writing it now.


    Kali was a shepherd before being a warrior. Being shepherd was highly regarded in our community. I could not follow in Kali¡¯s steps as of now (I refused to enter the tournament) as a warrior so I asked my parents to refer me to be a shepherd (and earn a bit of money by doing so). As first days of spring came, around 10 wannabe or apprentice shepherds like me were asked to join the shepherds near the statue of Kali at the entrance of our village.  I do not remember mentioning it but our village was the village, which Kali establish in Kastiffs. We met after the first fool moon. It was time to take cattle and sheep to mountain banks. I was trusted with 50 sheep to look after and a shepherd dog to help me out with them.  I had a de-motivational conversation with the shepherd named Vidac on my first day.


    [Me]: Vidac are not you guys are going to explain what am I supposed to do?


    [Vidac]: You will be provided with food and drinks regularly. Have your knife on you at all times.


    [Me]: Is that all?


    [Vidac]: Listen kid, we are not in Mehn academy. We are not teaching you magic or art of war. We are shepherd. The golden rule is: close your mouth and open your eyes. The dog will do everything. It knows better than you what it has to do. Just stick with the pack. In that pack the dog is the leader. Just feed it once a day and that¡¯s all.


    [Me]: Is that¡­


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.[Vidac]: Just shut up already. Do not forget the golden rule. Any more questions and you are going back to your house.


    We left the village after few hours. In few days, we began to settle on mountain banks with 5-6 hours of walk different between each other. Vidac was right on spot. Dog knew what it had to do. When sheep went off the course it was running around and barking to keep them altogether. Once a day, a rider would pass by and bring food enough for 3 days both for the dog and me. My knowledge about dogs was limited to: a good dog eats only once a day. Two days after the fifth arrival of the rider, late at night, an hour or so before the dawn I heard unnatural voices and woke up. Fire was still on. I took a branch, lighted it out and looked at the direction where voice came from. I could not see what was happening so I got curious. I was so curious that I did not look around. I was too focused on that location and a sleepy to recognize that something wrong is happening. After 10 or 15 meters I saw the scene, which terrified me to the bone. The sheep, all of them, were slain. Blood was streaming as if there is river.


    I was to horrified. I wanted to run. I could not. Thoughts were coming to my head non-stop. A beast did it? Maybe a demon did? At that moment I saw the eyes. I would never forget those eyes. I stopped. Whatever it was it was closing down distance between us, but in a slow manner. I passed the fire torch from my right hand to the left one and with my right hand took out the knife. It did not stop. In a matter of seconds, I could see it. It was a wolf. It opened its mouth and whatever was left of dog fell. The wolf has made a mess with the dog. I wanted to turn back and run. Run as fast as I could. I did not. I would give my best. ¡°A warrior never backs away¡± came to my mind. I bended my body little bit so that to increase my chance of taking wolf by surprise. Wolf teeth could be seen now. Blood was flowing from its mouth. It knew that it is going kill me. Instincts probably. It was aware of the situation too. It growled. At that moment my senses came back to me. I had to do something. The only thing came to my mind was not to back away. I did let go of every emotion. I stopped thinking. Everything was in slow motion. A second felt like a year. In an instant wolf jumped, and I pushed torch towards its neck and making sure that the torch would hit on its belly. It knew that torch of that size won¡¯t affect it, but wolf tried to make sure that its head is not hit by the torch. In that moment, I let go of the torch and jumped forward the wolf¡¯s belly and using both my hands stabbed the knife a bit under the wolf neck. I didn¡¯t stop or could not because of the fear. I pushed and pushed. The wolf lost its momentum and fell on me. I felt the warm blood all on me. I tried to push the wolf but could not. I lost all the power in my arms in a moment. Blood was gushing down for a few seconds more and it stopped. I could feel the rectum, catgut and colon all on me. Instead of pushing the wolf, I squeezed my self from under it. I began to cry. I cried a lot. I had never cried in my life as in this time. Wolf¡¯s cry. I sat near the corpse of wolf.


    After few hours, rider came. He saw me, and got in shock. Every single sheep was killed. I was sitting near the corpse of wolf covered in blood. I could not let go off the knife. I told him to get Vidac.


    Vidac took me to the village. We packed wolf¡¯s corpse too. We did not exchange a word or discuss anything. I knew that he had his eyes on me. He was checking me out. Maybe expected me to begin the conversation. But I let it go. I wanted to sleep. I was welcomed by my father and mother and the rest of the villagers at the entrance. Village elder Taham asked me:


    [Taham]: Were you afraid that you could die?


    [Me]: The one who thinks about his end cannot be a hero.


    Taham laughed at that..


    Next: Chapter 03 - Aslan</a>

 Chapter 03 - Aslan

    Chapter 03 ¨C Aslan


    Taham told me that I earned my ticket to Mehn Academy. He will refer me to academy as a candidate. Even though Taham was elder of our village, he was influential all over the kingdom. Nevertheless, he was the elder of the motherland. The original village establish by Kali. I was told that wolf¡¯s corps could be buried or burned. I choose neither. I wanted it to be cleaned and stuffed to be kept. I asked my mother for that and she told me it is not a good omen but I insisted and she did as I told her. Until the summer I was more or less free. I was reading a lot. Basic mana manipulation, history, mathematics, philosophy and anything that I could get my hands on. Even the water would rot if it was kept in same place for a long time. A person who thought that he reached his peak would not improve but self-destruct. I was thirsty for knowledge. As I knew more, I felt I know less as there was more to learn and grasp and less time to apply the knowledge on practical life. My greatest challenge was time. You could not stop it, or manipulate it. Life is a race against time. Use of time or its management was my first and foremost trial.


    I was not an outgoing kid. I would always prefer to listen and if my opinion was asked I would try to express myself in few words as possible. Few times, I tried to talk in depth to my mother about what I feel like who I am and what I want to do, I saw the expression in her eyes and let it go. She looked at me as she would always looked at my father. I reckon she thought I resemble him. I hated the idea. So I stopped conversing with her.


    third week of summer: 15 year old girl called Mariette won the tournament. It was her and me who would be sent to Mehn academy and would not pay a penny for our education over there. There were rich traders, elders of villages, amirs of provinces and their viziers who could afford to send their kids to Mehn and most of the time they did to show off them as valuable ¡°assets¡± of kind in the future. I get to know that Dar brought to land together but messed up our tribal values. Dignity, pride and way of warrior was getting lost as time passed. Regardless, peace and stability was upon us. Beast men of the north and demons of the south have not attacked us in a long time. Warriors were getting used to peace.


    Peace and stability had its positive sides to it too. You could buy fish and caviar in our village likewise in Mehn they could buy magical healing herbs from our village. Trade was booming. I did not like the idea but I was not against it either like my father. You had to adapt to current situation to afford the best. As members of Kali tribe we were exempt from most of the taxes. It was a great advantage. That¡¯s why most of the big time traders were from our tribe, but who have moved to different parts of the kingdom and established their business. My father was dreaming about the past, while my mother wanted to live in the present. I, in contrast, wanted to strive to future that should be molded with my hands and brains.


    My father¡¯s skin color was a bit dark. My mother¡¯s was very bright. Both of them had black hair and black eyes. My sister took after my father. Dark skinned girl, with big black eyes and white teeth. She was beautiful. More than 5 prominent families of our kingdom had sent their son¡¯s and lots of dowry to ask her hand in marriage from my father. Normally, parents were the ones who approved the marriage. In our case, the useless father let us do to whatever we want (and by God, mom was going crazy because of his decision). My sister had refused everyone. Once she told me she would marry the one who she would fell in love with. I smiled and nodded. My skin color is brownish. As I grew up I looked more and more like my father. After the wolf thing, I began to run few kilometers a day. I knew that the next time if I met something that endangers my life I won¡¯t be as lucky as that day. I talked to my mom about my interest in magic. She told me that she would speak with village shaman and if I was eligible she would initiate the process for mana acquisition and manipulation and teach me few basic spells of fire or water. She had mana affiliated of fire and water. Quite a few magicians had more than one affiliated element. It¡¯s just she gave up everything for my father. He did not live up to her expectations. Life is cruel.


    Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    The next day, we went to shaman¡¯s hut. Shaman was more like a religious figure rather than magician. Her name was Hitomi. I never saw her face as she was covered in robe and would not show her face to anybody. But she had those beautiful blue eyes. They mesmerized me. Same night my mother brought me to her hut again. It was located in rear end of the village facing the big mountains. I was told to stay calm through the process so that not to hurt myself or go crazy. She told me it is easy when you let go of everything and let the nature show you the pass rather than pushing for the answer. I listened to her carefully. She told me after the process ended, I would either awaken the mana deposit within me(if there was any at all) or have the ability to acquire the mana surrounding me that existed in nature(it was the hard way, as I have read about them in my free time).  She brought up a glass of a drink. I was supposed to drink it facing towards the mountains sitting in lotus position. I drank it in one go. Closed my eyes and began to chant prayers. I would call upon the nature to show me the pass.


    Firstly, there was something that was burning inside me, as if blood was rushing all over my body much faster than it was supposed to. I got used to it. I did let go of everything. I began to lose myself. It felt as if I had no legs or arms or abdomen or head. It was like some kind of out of body experience. Everything became dark. Darkness all around me. I forgot the prayers, I stopped even trying to remember them. Submitting to the situation and waiting was the only choice.


    A voice. I heard it.


    [Me]: Who is it?


    [-]: You are going crazy my friend.


    [Me]: You are the one talking and responded to my question.


    [-]: Am I?


    [Me]: Who are you?


    [-]: I am Aslan.


    [Me]: We have same names.


    [Aslan]: Why are you here?


    [Me]: I want Mother Nature to show me the way.


    [Aslan]: Does my voice sounds like Mother Nature talking to you?


    [Me]: I am lost?


    [Aslan]: Where did you expect to be?


    [Me]: Hitomi told me... [I was stopped]


    [Aslan]: Cut the crap! Hitomi this, Hitomi that. The only useful thing what she did all this time was giving you the drink.


    [Me]: You know about the drink?


    [Aslan]: We did drink it, didn¡¯t we? Listen, I will let you see but choice is up to you. You will never ever see me or hear from me again. Good luck and do not die.


    And it happened. Lights popped out of everywhere. They looked like stars of the sky. A beautiful sight to see. I was engulfed in pleasure, overwhelmed at beauty. I was floating in the darkness and they were surrounding me. Stars began to fade away slowly. It was dark again. I began to open my eyes.


    P.S: If you guys could comment on what should I elaborate on more and which parts should I pass by less would be awesome. By the way, I''m sorry for my bad English. Do not expect more than this.


    P.P.S: Right now and for the next few chapters, you readers should take it as introduction. We will move up story, go into details about MC and other characters as story goes by. I''m planning a crazy twist so just keep up reading.


    Next: Chapter 04 - Challenger?</a>

 Chapter 04 – Challenger?

    Chapter 04 ¨C Challenger?


    It felt chilly. The wind was blowing a bit faster than it was supposed to. I opened my eyes but I was dizzy. Eyesight was blurry and I could not understand where I am. I regained my sense shortly. I was on top of a big rock close near mountain Retnus. Retnus was the closest mountain to my village. But how did I end up here? I turned back to my village and the scene was unpleasant one to see. Everything in between the village and the rock I was sitting on was burned down to ashes. Did I do it? Heck no. I ain¡¯t no magician. I knew few spells from the book but have had no experience in igniting them. I felt a presence to my left, turned instinctively to see the shaman. She took off hoodie of her robe and closed on me. She kissed my forehead.


    [Me]: What the hell, Hitomi? (I crawled back a bit, but got afraid to fall of the rock so stopped)


    [Hitomi]: I¡¯m older than your mother, Aslan. It¡¯s just I got excited. I haven¡¯t seen anybody to have done this much of a damage after awakening their mana stream.


    [Me]: No offence, but I think you are mistaken.


    [Hitomi]: about what?


    [Me]: About your last assumption.


    [Hitomi]: You did it. (Pointing her right arm to the area)


    [Me]: Okay, what else I did?


    [Hitomi]: You were flying.


    [Me]: Anything else?


    [Hitomi]: I could only watch from distance, so not sure.


    [Me]: Hitomi, first of all, I did no such thing as flying or burning down the fields. Secondly, I do not know any spell by heart to chant or how to ignite it. You are mistaken. Now would you mind taking me back to village?


    [Hitomi]: You are a dumb one.


    [Me]: Am I going to freeze to death in here, or we are going back to village?


    Hitomi whistled and gryphon flew towards us. She took my hand and told me no to be scared of Aiki. We jumped on top of gryphon and ordered her to take us to village. Aiki was one of few gryphons which existed and she could be considered as an excellent tool in times of war. Hitomi told me that she cared for Aiki as a part of her own. She was like a daughter to her which she never had. Aiki landed near the shaman¡¯s hut, we got off and she went off to other side of hut to lay down. Gryphons were considered noble creatures who could never sway to the evil side and finding and taming one was a quest in itself which could take centuries with no results. I saw that Aiki and Hitomi had mutual relationship of respect so my perception of Hitomi changed positively. Hitomi told me not tell anybody about what she told me and I obliged. She chanted a spell, a few minutes after literally land began to awaken. Fields that were burned to ash began to be filled with grasses again. In a matter of half an hour, you could not get any kind of evidence as if nothing ever has happened. She told me:


    [Hitomi]: You should go back home and sleep up to rejuvenate. After 2 days come again to see me. I have few things to teach you. Remind you again, don¡¯t talk about what you saw today to anybody. Not even to your parents. Anything else?


    [Me]: You look beautiful why are you hiding your face?


    [Hitomi]: You get grilled or you go home. So what you choose? (There was a small fire ball over her hand, even though the size was small I could feel the intense heat)


    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    I turned away, without understanding the change in her attitude and went close to gryphon. Aiki looked at me. I patted her head, said thank you and went away. Slowly passed by village market. It was too early for folks to arrive here. Took first left, walked another 15-20 minutes and I was by our house. Opened the door, entered the yard. We had lots of fruit trees in the yard. Apple, peach, pomegranate, and plum trees on the right side of the yard. On the left side we had carrots, oranges, cabbages, watermelons, melons. There were more but my memory of the house is limited to that now. It¡¯s been many years I have left it. I saw my mom. She was a diligent woman. Waking up early every day, and make sure household is functioning properly. Our tribe was patriarchal, but my family was matriarchal. She asked me whether I was hungry, I refused the offer and told her I want to sleep. I told her shaman told me the results were positive but I didn¡¯t up to what degree and asked me to come after two days for a teaching. She smiled at me. I got into the house. Went to bed and slept like a horse.


    I came my senses as mass of water surged on me. I jump out of bed, hit my head while jumping and saw my sister with her devilish look and grin on her face.


    [Me]: Lei what the hell?


    [Lei]: There is a girl waiting for you for the last 2 hours. I tried woke you up gently, but you refused. This is the limit of my patience. Now get up and see her. She has been standing and refusing to talk to anybody but you.


    [Me]: The only girl I know is you. Who the hell? Hahahahaa (I begin to laugh)


    [Lei]: Gone crazy or what? Why are you laughing?


    [Me]: Who do you think is going to clean the room now? Ha? Your plan backfired!!


    She stood there for a few seconds thinking about something. She exited the room and went away.


    I took of my pajamas. Dried myself with a towel. Put on clothes and went to guest room. I entered the room. I nodded to my mom who was sitting on chair and Lei was besides her grinning. I turned to my right and there was this girl. Clean black shoes, white socks up to her knees and it seems she had a tail. Anyway I look up her and she wore a slim black mini dress. She was blonde with hair up to hear shoulders. Her cleavage was so nonexistent that you could mix her for a boy if she had my clothes on her.


    [-]: At last. You peasant has messed up my schedule by more than enough. Get ready. I..


    [Me]: Is that tail? (I pointed towards the things behind her legs)


    [-]: No idiot. It¡¯s my sword. Now get ready. I¡­


    [Me]: Who are you?


    [-]: Stop speaking and listen to me until the end.


    Silence¡­


    [-]: I am Mariette. The winner of this year¡¯s tournament. (She unsheathed her sword.) I challenge you to duel.


    I turned towards my sister.


    [Me]: She is crazy. I told you the only girl I know is you and you didn¡¯t believe me¡­


    My sister began to laugh¡­


    Next: Chapter 05 - Training!</a>

 Chapter 05 - Training!

    Chapter 05 ¨C Training!


    [Mariette]: We are the only people who are candidates to be selected to Mehm Academy (free riders. haha) from this village.


    [Me]: So?


    [Mariette]: I have promised myself to be the strongest one to go there. So I had fought every single contestant and there is you here now.


    [Me]: So what?


    [Mariette]: We have to duel and see who is the stronger.


    [Me]: Mariette, your logic is flawed. You do not have consequential order of arguments lined up rather you are acting upon your emotions. I hate the idea of tournament. I do not like fighting against humans in cases such as these. Especially a girl like you.


    [Mariette]: What do you mean ¡°a girl like you¡±? Ha! I am worth thousands like you. Now accept the challenge!


    [Me]: I will not. But if you come again in three days I may change my mind. Take it or leave it?!


    She put her hand under her chin and began to think.


    [Mariette]: I will see you in 3 days.


    She turned towards the door. Left the house. My mother told me she was a sweet girl. Lei was begging my mom so that I clean my room today.


    The next day, mother woke me up early. I told her what was going on. She did not reply. Just asked me get dressed, we were going to travel for few hours. On the way I learnt that we were heading over to Nurs. It is a mountain village. It¡¯s so cold over there that in summers at nights when they sleep they wrap themselves so much that we do not do that in winters back in our village. After few hours of horse riding we reached Nurs.


    My mother did believe in supernatural stuff. I believe in God too. But she was a little bit in the extreme side of belief.


    Nurs was a big village, but not so much occupancy in comparison to lands that it had. Most probably attacks of the beast men from north has its effects on its congestion. I do not remember which house we did enter but I remember there were a lot of people inside the yard as if waiting for somebody. One by one people on queue were entering the house and left smiling with some kind of hope. Our turn came and we entered too. The room had an ancient feeling to it. Even the walls were covered with rugs and carpets. They designs on them which I could not recognize. Suddenly music began [http://youtu.be/xIGzSCGJLvw?t=44s</a>]. From the opposite side of room smoke blew up and an old woman appeared. She was in lotus position. Slowly she opened her eyes and looked at mom.


    [Old Hag]: Come dear, come close to me.


    Mom smiled and looked at me and we began to walk towards old hag (I knew she was fishy).


    [Old Hag]: Aslan, do not be afraid. Come closer. You may not know me, but I know you very well. I am not going to hurt. I will tell you what awaits you in future so that you should be prepared for good or bad that has to come.


    [Mother]: Aslan, come on sit in front of aunt Cumaja. [Old hag was not related to us or to our tribe in any possible way, the word aunt was used as in politeness]


    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    I walked with my mother following me. Came close enough to Cumaja. Sat in front of her. She looked at me and said.


    [Cumaja]: Don¡¯t you want to know?


    [Me]: ¡­ [Didn¡¯t responded to her to see what was she up to, but I assume she thought I was impressed enough]


    [Cumaja]: Give me both of your hands.


    I put my hands forward and she took them.


    [Cumaja]: I see¡­ I see¡­ [She was moving her body like a snake to right and left]


    You know when you stand on a valley in hot weather and a cold breeze passes by you and you get a cool feeling as if some type of pleasure. I felt something like that through my hands. She was sending her own mana to my body. I got her trick. It wasn¡¯t mana absorption but kind of measuring mana deposit of the person in front of you (Good God, I was happy that I had read about basic mana stuff).


    She released my hand¡­


    [Cumaja]: I felt the power. It all depends on you. Your future is a bit blurry. It may be good or bad but either way it will be easy for you if you nurture yourself. Do not¡­


    I interrupted her.


    [Me]: You are good at mana recognition. You are a professional. But I thought you are going to tell me about my future, what you are telling me is useless as of now because tomorrow Shaman Hitomi will teach me practical way rather than BS what you spurting.


    [Cumaja]: Blasphemy. Sacrilege.


    [Me]: Really? You have a good knowledge of vocabulary. Would you mind explaining what charlatan means?


    My mother was shocked.


    [Cumaja]: I curse you. By the God, I curse you. Listen to me kid, when you reach 21 you will disappear. You will not see face of your kid. Just disappear. I curse you!!


    [Me]: Haha. What a scene. Make me disappear now rather than giving me another 8 years of time.


    I stood up and turned towards mom.


    [Me]: This is why poor are poor. Because we spend money on things what we do not need. I will use my hands to mold my future. Let¡¯s go!


    I took my mom¡¯s hand and we left the house. Took our ride back home. Mother did not talk to me about that day.


    In the morning of the third day I woke up early and left to shaman¡¯s hut. Hitomi and Aiki were waiting for me in front of the hut.


    [Hitomi]: Are you ready?


    [Me]: I am not going to drink that second time¡­


    [Hitomi]: Haha¡­ No, we are going to train. Overall it will take a week. In that time I can offer you all my knowledge.


    [Me]: Hahahahaa¡­ [I was laughing.]


    [Hitomi]: Are you taking me lightly?


    [Me]: No it¡¯s just I can imagine what face Mariette would will make when she comes my house today.


    We hopped on Aiki and it flew towards¡­


    Next: Chapter 06 - The sword does not...</a>


    <hr />


    Do not forget to play the music, the youtube link is provided, to read and enjoy the setting.

 Information [Must see]

    </a>


    I would like to thank everyone who is interested and still keeps reading my story.


    Wolf¡¯s Cry is my first fanfiction try so, I will do my best not to drop it halfway through. The story is progressive as it gets fun and detail oriented after each chapter (I can¡¯t guarantee it for everyone; I enjoy writing it). I thought having everything explained in the first chapter and going on with whatever left was not my type of storytelling so I tried my best to avoid it.


    Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    Story get interesting around chapter 4.


    There are going to be few twists that, would change your perception of story, are not swaying from the main story. As you read more you will now what is happening.  (I will update this part, do not want to spoil)


    I''m planning to finish it, so it aint going to be on hiatus or something like that. If you want to entertain your brain its a good FF to read.


    p.s: click on the picture and listen to the music

 Chapter 06 - The sword does not...

    Aiki took us to top of Retnus Mountain. Kastiff was massive range of mountains beginning from Land of Elves up to lake Kasp. Retnus was one of the smallest ones on the list. Nevertheless, it peak was covered in snow all year around. Aiki descended close to the peak and went inside a cave. The felt as if not used for a long time, but had few places where fire tracks were left. I thought Hitomi has used this place for her own trainings but was not interested in asking her for more details.


    [Hitomi]: Aslan you should get used to this place, it will be your home for the first part of the training.


    [Me]: It does not seem big enough to practice any spells. Do you have anything in mind?


    [Hitomi]: You are quick to catch. You will mediate over here. Nobody or nothing will interrupt you.


    [Me]: What about you guys?


    [Hitomi]: You shouldn¡¯t worry about us, neither for yourself. I will leave 2 apples with you. That should be more than enough for 2 days. Get into lotus position and meditate to reach the state of mind, which you had 3 days ago.


    [Me]: Should I chant a special prayer?


    [Hitomi]: No, just meditate and bring out your mana. You have to lose your ego to control it though. In this cave, you can¡¯t hurt anyone and nobody will be able to hurt you. This is the best place for meditation. Good luck!


    She sat on top of Aiki and gryphon began to fly. Just before leaving she told me not to freeze to death and they left.


    In the last 3 months of training, my body has become strong. My height went up to 5¡¯6. For a 13-year-old kid my body had a good vibe. Height was average but my body build was better than most.  I could survive 2 days, by eating an apple a day. I did not have any matches on me to start a fire nor there was wood around. Thinking about it, the only way around was to meditate.


    I sat on ground, got into lotus position and closed my eyes. I began to breathe in from my nose and breathe out from my mouth. As time passed, I felt the darkness surrounding me again. I was not in trance because of a drink this time, so I knew that I had control over my conscious and unconscious part of my brain and soul. I was in control but I felt as if something was missing. I opened my eyes but darkness had already taken over. Wherever I looked it was dark. Complete darkness. I shivered for a moment, and then felt the cold. My body was freezing. Nobody was around to help. I was going to die. Fear of death made me panic. I was going to freeze to death. A conversation that I had read between two lovers who got out of near death situation popped up on my mind at that moment.


    [woman]: aren¡¯t you afraid of death, my love?


    [man]: why should I be afraid of death, when I am determined to live for you, my love?


    I closed my eyes again. If I was supposed to die even if the whole world came to help me nobody could. If I was supposed to live even if the whole world came to kill me nobody could. So why should I be afraid of death? But letting go of the life was not a wise idea too. I just didn¡¯t have to be attached to any of those two.


    Darkness faded away. I opened my eyes. I was in the cave in lotus position. Light that looked like star popped up all around me. Freezing went away. One by one they entered my body. No words can describe the feeling that I experienced. The mana had taken a physical form and engulfed my body from head to toe. I stood up and turned to entrance of the cave. Aiki flew inside. Hitomi looked at me.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    [Hitomi]: Blue flames.


    [Me]: I am in ecstasy.


    [Hitomi]: You should be. It¡¯s been 7 days/


    [Me]: You told me you would come after me in 2 days, what happened?


    [Hitomi]: I came and checked on you. You were in trance so I did not want to disturb you. But by today if you did not come out of it, I was planning to force you out of meditation.


    I had a different feel about myself.


    [Hitomi]: One more trick before we end up the training. Imagine and visualize backside of my hut.


    [Me]: Okay.


    [Hitomi]: Now chant ¡°Inem apra¡±


    [Me]: Inem apra!


    I lost my balance and fell of on my butt. It hurted. I was behind her hut. Unbelievable. I look at my arms and hands the mana was gone. I wanted it to be back and it engulfed me again. I wanted it to disappear and it went away. I felt a bit tired and went into hut. There was a feast inside and I did not wait for Hitomi and began to eat. My stomach was full. Hitomi entered the hut after few hours.


    [Hitomi]: Flying takes a lot of time and energy.


    [Me]: What happened to me back in cave? How come I was here in matter of a moment when it took you guys hours?


    [Hitomi]: You teleported. It takes an enormous amount of mana but you managed.


    Later on she went into details to explain about teleportation and how an important spell that was.


    Hut¡¯s door was cracked down and Mariette barged in.


    [Mariette]: You are a liar and a coward! Come with me now to tournament stadium or I will kill you here.


    I stood up.


    [Mariette]: Follow me.


    I went after her and we reached arena after 25 minutes of fast walk. She entered it first and positioned herself to exact opposite of our initial entrance. Most of the village had seen us walking towards the arena and came with us to watch. I did hear people betting on us.


    She unsheathed her sword and pointed it in my direction. Mana was engulfing my body.


    [Mariette]: Tora no kiba! (fangs of tiger)


    A massive tiger was formed out of wind, as if opening its mouth and showing it¡¯s fangs it came up on me. I did not move. Did not felt like it. I faced it head on. There was a massive shockwave. I was standing as if nothing happened. Mariette was in shock. I imagined and visualized that I am near Mariette left side and ¡­


    [Me]: Inem apra!


    I appeared right behind her. She did not know where I was. She was in shock. Who wouldn¡¯t be? I used my left hand and grabbed from her waist and brought her body to touching distance to mine(a bit to intimate). My right arm going over her shoulder I grabbed her right arm.  I bended my head a bit, and whispered to her left ear¡­


    [Me]:  The sword does not suit a beautiful girl like you!


    She dropped the sword and ¡­


    Next: Chapter 07 - The Usual Politics!</a>

 Chapter 07 - The Usual Politics!

    Chapter 07 ¨C The usual politics!


    Her face became red all of a sudden. She began to tremble all over. I thought she couldn¡¯t accept her defeat and had a mental break of a kind so I put a bit more force on my left arm and pressed her small body tightly onto mine. Even though she was older than me, we had a bit of height difference.


    I was taller now. Pull-ups had an effect on my body size.


    I heard whistles from all over the arena. Back then had no idea why they did whistle and began to clap. I looked around, some were shouting that I should kiss her on lips. Why should I? Was it a kind of ritual or rule that winner had to kiss the loser? What the hell, what if 2 males were fighting?! I got disgusted of that idea so much that I let go her unintentionally. She turned, facing me for a second, observing me. Should I kiss her now? The idea of kissing her had me blushing too. I wanted to do it. And she slapped me hard. What the hell?


    [Mariette]: PERVERT!


    She ran away. What does pervert mean?  I looked around and saw my family. I went to them. My mother had her face down to ground. My sister had the devilish look and grinning. My father was laughing.


    [Father]: That¡¯s my son. I¡¯m proud of you!


    [Me]: You saw how I teleported. It was awesome, isn¡¯t it? I can engulf my body in mana so that it protects me from harm upto some level. Nice, ha?


    [Father]: Dumb kid! Don¡¯t you know I despise fighting? I¡¯m talking about the blondie.


    [Lei]: He is clueless.


    Father put his arm on my shoulder.


    [Father]: Aslan, it¡¯s time talk about some important matters.


    [Me]: Me becoming a warrior?


    [Father]: No! More important than being a warrior! More important than demons! More important than beast men! More important than world peace! Although not as important as female elves.


    My mother pinched my father. We want back home.


    We had a meal. Father did not drink. He looked at me and made facial expressions as if to follow him. I stood before him and went out. He walked out just after me.


    [Father]: After me!


    [Me]: Okay.


    We walked a bit so that we get out of reach of people.


    [Father]: We need to have man to man talk.


    He told me about everything. Literally, everything. How to please and get the pleasure. If the stuff what he told me about could be classified as science and had a school of its own he would be the headmaster. He talked about his youth and I again confirmed that he was a certified as*#01e. He had become a warrior just to please his carnal pleasures. Though I got to accept that he had planned out everything in details like what he would do and how he would it. His story ended by marriage and how after marrying mother he stopped and throw himself into alcohol.


    [Father]: Aslan, there is just one thing you do not have to do. It¡¯s a rule #1. You broke it today morning. I will help you get out of situation this time. But do not expect me to be there every single time.


    [Me]: The rule is?


    [Father]: Actually, it was a rule that I had come up with after marrying your mother. I¡¯m going to pass it to you, so I think it should be referred as proverb.


    After using ¡°proverb¡±, he stalled for a moment and smiled. It was an evil grin.


    [Father]: Snake crawls in curves to everywhere it goes, but in a straight line when it enters its own house.


    [Me]: What you mean?


    [Father]: Snake is me. Everywhere was any other place which I had gone. Curves is the process of meeting woman from other tribe. Using their insecurities while saving caravan from demons or protecting their village from beast men attacks. Own house is my own tribe. Never! Never ever do anything that could get you married into a girl from our tribe. We have some strict rules. I got into alcohol because I could not lead the life which I had before marriage. If I did, you would be fatherless now.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    [Me]: What rules?


    [Father]: You will learn tonight. Let¡¯s go.


    We went back to home.


    We had guests. I saw Mariette sitting beside a man and a woman. My father took control of the situation from moment one. Introduced me to them and asked my mother to bring tea or coffee. They choose tea as drinks. My mom nodded and went to kitchen.


    Raez was Mariette¡¯s father¡¯s name and Lynnette was her mother name. Mariette didn¡¯t greet anybody, she had her head down looking to her knees. She looked like a doll. She was wearing very beautiful blue dress down to her knees and black shoes.


    After tea was served.


    [Father]: Brother Raez, may I know the reason for a visit to our house by a great warrior such as yourself?


    [Raez]: Don¡¯t sweet-talk me. Tonight they will be betrothed!


    [Father]: What is the reason for betrothal?


    [Raez]: Your son defiled my daughter in front of all village and tribesmen. Anything more?


    [Father]: I think you are mistaken Raez. First of all, my son is (it seemed like he used WAS) a pure kid of 13 years of age. Secondly, there could be no kind of dishonoring in duel within the context what you are talking about. You are a great warrior, but do not forget that I had my share of accomplishments in my time before I retired. I still know what a duel is. In any duel, there is no male or female. There are just 2 sides. Two warriors or apprentices facing each other to prove or test their skills. What I saw today was a duel where my son won with a great advantage using his bare hands (he had an evil grin for a second). He did not have or used a weapon. How as a warrior he should attack or defend without using a weapon? His hands of course. I would feel like you would if it happened to my daughter too. But we are not kids, we are grown up people. We should avoid acting upon emotions and think rationally. In case, you want a public speech from me regarding this matter, I will state everything what I have told to you. I will personally challenge anybody who even whispers about this matter later on to a duel of death. That is all what I have to say.


    I was frozen. I never expected him to be this sly.


    [Raez]: But¡­


    [Father]: Raez for the next 4 years they will study together. If they feel anything towards each other I will be honored to come to your house for marriage proposal.


    A person opened the door and entered our house.


    [-] Thank god, I found both of families over here. I was sent after you guys.


    [Messenger]: Village elder Taham wants to see both of you families in his house right now.


    Mariette¡¯s family left before us. As we were leaving after them¡­


    [Me]: I hope Taham does not force the marriage upon me.


    [Father]: I do not think he is calling us for that.


    [Me]: What for then?


    [Father]: Usual politics, my son. The usual politics!


    Next: Chapter 08 - Skeleton Warriors.</a>

 Chapter 08 – Skeleton Warriors!

    Chapter 08 ¨C Skeleton Warriors!


    On the way to village elder¡¯s house:


    [Father]: Aslan, I haven¡¯t seen a single warrior or mage who could extract so much mana just to cover their body with it. It has not reached perfection yet but with regular training you could foolproof it to defend against both physical and magical attacks. It was not wise to show off you skill on your first battle. Do not forget that Taham and Hamil are cousins. Their mothers are sisters. Times have changed. There is tribe, but bigger than tribe there is a kingdom. Power corrupts. I think Hamil will take over after Dar¡¯s death because our tribal rules do not apply to kingdom. If he is smart then he won¡¯t tolerate anybody with potential to be threat to him in future. After your performance, you are a threat. I would think of you like a threat if I were in Taham¡¯s shoes. Better watch your mouth as you have always done. Speak less. Listen to everything. Be sharp!


    We reached village elder¡¯s house. Entered it. We were offered drinks by maids. I took coffee while mother and father tried Mehnian tea with some cookies. Raez, Lynnette and Mariette were there sitting besides us in the guest room.


    I have never seen a beautiful house as village elder¡¯s one. The ground was made of white and black marbles. The walls that were looking outside had windows which were in 2 meters of height. Sculptures of gryphons, lions and eagles were on corners of the guest room. My and Mariette¡¯s family were seated on leather sofas few meters after the main gate to the guest room. Gas lamps were located a meter apart from each other and all of them lighted the room in a strange manner.  Large wooden door with carvings on it opened from the opposite side and Taham entered the guest room. He welcomed us again and directed us towards the other part of guest room which seemed more like work-place. He sat on an armchair which was elegantly carved of out of wood. The wood was colored in gold. Arm resting parts of the chair were carved so that they seemed like paws of lion. The leather was green in color. We sat on expensive looking stools but they didn¡¯t gave the vibe of the armchair which Taham was sitting on. Some kind of incense was burning somewhere in the room out of sight. The room had a distinct aura to it because of incense and all the hard thought design. Power did corrupt. Warrior supposed to live a simple life.


    [Taham]: Today is 3rd day of Ram. In two months, 1st of Onylys, Mehn academy will have orientation for newcomers. Aslan and Mariette¡¯s education, accommodation and living expenses will be free of charge because of Mariette¡¯s extraordinary performance in tournament and Aslan¡¯s bravery in mountains. What will not be covered are travel costs.


    [Raez]: I will be sending Mariette to capital in a month¡¯s time. She will be flying there with express balloons. I will invest in my daughter and tribe¡¯s future by giving my all.


    [Father]: Financially, I will be troubled to cover his travel expenses so maybe I won¡¯t send him at all.


    [Taham]: As a fellow tribesman, I will not stand by when a talent such as Aslan does not get what he really deserves. I saw the fight in arena today (I peeked at Mariette, our eyes met and she blushed). I was impressed. A trader friend of mine, travel¡¯s between Mehn and our village once a year. Fortunately, his caravan will be leaving to Mehn tomorrow. I will ask him to take Aslan with them, of course without payment, but Aslan will help them out throughout the journey and will fulfill the duty assigned to him.


    If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Father and Taham looked at me.


    [Me]: Thank you, village elder. I am honored that a person of your position has taken an interest in helping me out.


    [Taham]: Our duty is to help the young ones in their journey. Our tribe needs warriors such as you. Tomorrow at dawn meet me at village entrance.


    We had another cup of drinks and left afterwards. We arrived at our house.


    [Father]: You made your choice.


    I nodded.


    [Father]:  I hope you do not regret. I wish you all the best.


    [Me]: I¡¯m going to sleep.


    [Father]: We all should.


    We all went to our rooms. I sneaked out of my room. Run as fast as possible. I wasn¡¯t thinking but acting on my emotions. In less than 10 minutes I reach my destination, jumped over the fence. Tried my best not to make noise or attract attention. I was lucky. The window was open and she was stargazing. I sneaked under the window.


    [Me]: Beautiful.


    She looked at me indifferently.


    [Mariette]: Stars are beautiful.


    [Me]: I meant you are Would you mine if I jump in?


    [Mariette] Why?


    [Me]: I want to watch stars with you.


    She moved left, and I jumped in taking her action as approval. We stared a bit more. We turned to each other and our eyes met again. I closed on her and kissed her. Our lips departed.


    [Me]: I will see you in Mehn.


    [Mariette]: Be careful.


    I ran back to my house. Got into bed and slept well. Woke up very early. Everybody was up. Though, only father came with me to meet Taham. I was introduced to Ricat. He was not from our tribe but he seemed like capable man. We would be travelling to southern border and pass by Devil¡¯s Canyon so that Ricat could sell medicinal herbs to stores there. Ricat had seen my fight with Mariette and would provide me with food and place to sleep all the way to Mehn in exchange me guarding the caravan through the journey. I agreed on given terms.


    Ricat was a smart man. He would buy herbs, medicines and healing potions in their at cheap prices in villages such as ours or from big cities such as Mehn. Then he would travel the villages by Devil¡¯s Canyon to sell his inventory of products with trifold net profit. It was a dangerous journey but was worth the try. If he did buy 100 gold worth of herbs in Mehn and after a month and half of travel and trade would reach our village with 300 gold coins. Investing those 300 golds in business and in another months and half would reach Mehn with 900 gold coins. His expenditure was less than 100 golds during the journey. The other 9 months he would stay with his family and spend the money to his heart.


    In less than 15 days we reached Devil¡¯s Canyon and trouble knocked our doors on the first day. Two skeleton warriors¡­


    Next: Chapter 09 - In to the pit!</a>

 Chapter 09 - In to the pit!

    Chapter 09 ¨C The pit!


    We had 8 horse-mounted carriages on our caravan. Except one, all of them were filled with dried herbs, potions and medicines. The last one had spare clothing, water, meals, pots and the cook was riding in it. Ricat was stingy. He only hired 4 bodyguards including me. The other three mercenaries who were hired would be more than enough to fight off thieves or wild animals but not demons. I do not think up to that moment they have ever faced a demon or a beast man in a fight.


    Skeletons had only swords as weapons. They were of moderate height. The third bodyguard, which ran up the skeletons, made a hand gesture at me to stay away and watch. They were more experience in sword fighting than skeletons. The problem was, whatever they did, however they attacked, skeletons were unharmed. Bodyguards signed for an easy job, but this one was not. They were getting pushed back. As they got close to us, I saw clearly. The eye socks parts of the skulls were burning with mana. First skeleton had red colored mana and the second one green.


    It happened in a matter of seconds, one of the skeletons pushed its sword in to the stomach of a mercenary and slashed it right and left. Blood began to gush down from bodyguard¡¯s body. Skeleton didn¡¯t take out the sword; with an immense power it threw the bodyguard to air. Bodyguard¡¯s lifeless body dropped few meters away from us. The other two bodyguards were in shock. Disgusting cracking sounds came off from skeletons. Were they delighted and laughing? I didn¡¯t lose my composure. I went towards the dead body, took bodyguard¡¯s sword by releasing his fingers from sword¡¯s hilt. I released high amount of mana and engulfed my body in it.  The sword began to resonate with my mana.


    I teleported half a meter behind the skeleton and whistled. Skeleton turned back and I used all my strength to slash its skull with the sword. Skull was cut in half and blue mana dispersed into air. All of its bones got fall down to ground and turned to pebble. The second skeleton took a step to approach me, and an arrow smashed into its skull. This time red mana dispersed into air. Again all the bones fall down to ground but this time bones burned and smoke came out. I turned to right and saw a man with green and blue armor. He had a bow on his hand. He began to walk to us.


    The other bodyguards still in were in shock but Ricat was in control of caravan. Nobody had run away. Man in armor came close enough to us;


    [-]: I¡¯m Alves. I¡¯m a warrior with loyalty to Rogue¡¯s Battalion. We are in charge of protecting the 1st bridge. There was a massive attack of demons. Few sneaked around and these two skeletons were one of some who were sneaky enough to pass by. I¡¯m deeply sorry for what happened to you.


    [Ricat]: It¡¯s an honor to meet a warrior of Rogue¡¯s Battalion. I¡¯m a trader from Mehn. I¡¯m trading medicinal herbs and potions. It¡¯s my first time travelling by Devil¡¯s Canyon. Taham, old friend of mine, recommended me to travel by Devil¡¯s Canyon to increase my profit. I had told my companions of the route and its dangers. Everybody was ready to what may happen during the travel. You should not apologize to us. It is what we sign up for.


    [Alves]: If it¡¯s medicine that you trade, then may I invite you to our fort. Our potions are running low we will need to resupply.


    [Ricat]: I will be glad to.


    Men of our tribe were supposed to live a modest and simple life either as a shepherd or warrior. Taham¡¯s house changed my understanding of the values that he held as a tribesman. Sending me to travel by Devil¡¯s Canyon with a greedy merchant, knowing dangers of the travel, made me to despise the village elder.


    Devil is the name of first Demon Lord. The story is that she was so bored that she killed herself. Devil¡¯s Canyon takes its name from her. According to stories passed down by generation to generations, God created everything in 5 days. On sixth day God created demons. On seventh day God created canyon and located demons on the other side of it. Massive in width, with bare eyes you could not see from one end to the other. Nevertheless, God put 5 bridges that crossed the canyon. Why bridges? I do not know, maybe he/she is a prankster?


    The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    Devil¡¯s Canyon was mystery in itself. Nobody has come back alive after falling into it.


    We reached 1st bridge Alves showing us the way. The fort used by Rogue¡¯s Battalion had a design that would be unacceptable by normal standards. From bird view it was like a letter ¡°C¡± covering the bridges entrance. Their houses were behind the fort. No protection or whatsoever. Once you passed to the other side of fort, you would not be allowed to come back unless every single demon has been killed. Some demons could evade the fort by walking to the either extreme of ¡°C¡± structured fort. That happened rarely though.


    I got assimilated into the crowd easily. All of them were my relatives. I did not know them neither they knew me. I turned into a celebrity after they learnt that I was heading to Mehn academy for my studies. They went crazy as I engulfed my body in mana. Nobody had seen a person who could do that.


    Ricat¡¯s business was booming. He sold 2 carriages of medicine, herb and potions. He was smiling. We were to leave to 2nd bridge next day.


    Injured warriors were carried to huts to be healed. Potions worked instantly in healing warriors; herbs took a bit more time.


    I tried to learn as much as possible. Stuff like these could not be taught or experienced in any academy or school. Alves offered to show me bridge. I could pass to the other side of the fort. I had my confidence run of the roof as I had killed a skeleton before so I thought of myself as invincible. I told Ricat about the offer and he didn¡¯t care much. It was late sun was replaced by moon. I asked Alves if his offer still stands?  He nodded and put his arm on my shoulder and began to talk about his fights and how much ¡°fun¡± it was to fight demons.


    We reached fort¡¯s wall. It was so high that with bare eyes you couldn¡¯t give an approximate height size. He pointed towards the gate to pass to other side. It was made of liquid of some kind. We stood by it. He told me not to fear and step into it. He went first and I followed him. It seemed as just a step made but we were on the other side of it. He told me that when fight broke out the color and texture of the gate would change exact of the wall. You couldn¡¯t go back until every single demon would be killed. We walked all the way to right side of the bridge. I looked into Devil¡¯s Canyon. Nothing. Darkness.


    We turned to walk to gate and in an instant Alves jumped on me. I felt an arrow pass on him. He did not lose his composure. Stood up, took out his sword and told me to stay behind. Another attack was going to happen. Demons were rushing in. Warriors began to come out of gate to warzone. Battle began. I had the bodyguard¡¯s sword on me. Overconfident in my ability, I joined the battle.


    Headless armor with a katana and a golem came at me. I think they thought of me as an easy prey. Golem had a big hammer made of rocks. It made the first move. Hammer was aimed at me, I jumped back, and it hit the ground. Golem was very agile in regards to its size and composure. I was surprised. I engulfed my body in mana. Headless demon attacked me. My sword and its katana ¡°greeted¡± each other quite a few times. I had an adrenaline rush. I attacked Headless Demon; it defended and counter-attacked. I jumped back and right in fast consequential moves. I thought something was missing. I had lost the sight of golem. Maybe it had moved on and went to fight another warrior. Headless Demon began to run to close the distance between us. I used both hands to hold the sword and raised my arms to make the last move. I was too focused on Headless Demon, and the worst happened. A breeze came from the left side. My eyes turned to left; instantaneously hammer¡¯s edge hit my ribs and threw me into air. I felt an immense pain. My ribs were either cracked or broken. Worse than that the power of golem was so big that I was thrown to far away into the Devil¡¯s Canyon.


    The darkness welcomed me. In to the pit!


    Next: Chapter 10 - I don''t know.</a>

 Chapter 10 - I dont know.

    Chapter 10 ¨C I don¡¯t know.


    I fell into the canyon. Unfortunately, I hit my head into a rock and lost consciousness. It was a free fall I assume.


    I felt coldness first. Was it death? I opened my eyes, and noticed that I was in mass of water.  I did let go of myself.  Made a lucky guess on instincts and swam on. In around 10 seconds my head was out of water. I could breathe. It was too dark to determine where I should swim. It was a stream, maybe a large river. I let go of myself and floated on my back. My ribs were still hurting. I tried to think positive, but the reality was telling me the opposite. I didn¡¯t want to swim right or left, as it would be waste of energy. I couldn¡¯t determine which way would be close to the walls. Any kind of action would lead to drain of energy. Floating with the river would increase my chances of life than trying to find a way out.


    Most probably more than a week has passed. I do not know what to do. I¡¯m still sane but I may go crazy any minute now. It¡¯s frightening to be in a place where the only self-conscious living being is you.


    Even though there is nothing to eat, I¡¯m lucky that I won¡¯t be dying of dehydration.


    I¡¯m at point where I¡¯m becoming suspicious of my self-awareness. You know it¡¯s what you see, what you feel, what you hear and what you smell that makes you feel alive. Same type of experiences over long time in a same manner will make you feel dead. Actually being dead is better than life such as this one.


    Darkness was illuminated. Light was coming from my left. I looked at the direction the light was coming. Two torches clarified the dark. For a moment I thought I have gone crazy. Made up my mind, put all my strength together and swam towards the torches. There seemed to be 2 torches. In between them, there was a gap that looked like an entrance to someplace. I crawled on it. My right foot was still on water. Lying on something, even though it was stony, felt nice and refreshing. Three more torches lighted up. Walls began to tremble and a gate appeared. It opened and there seemed to be a room with a stone in middle of it. I began to levitate. My body was flying upwards. I could not move, or put a pressure against the force levitating me. I was too powerless and hungry to do anything at all. My body turned on its own and I faced the ceiling. I was inside the room. I can¡¯t remember anything about it. My body began to decelerate and stopped moving.  I heard voices. Somebody was talking but in a different language than our own. I had no idea what they were talking about and I didn¡¯t care less. Wherever I was, I was at their mercy. Suddenly,


    [-]: He should be able to understand us now.


    [-]: How long has it been since we had a visitor? Rai,any idea?


    [Rai]: 500 years? Verit he is going to die. We should hurry.


    [Verit]: I know. I want to meet our lord too. I¡¯m sick of waiting and doing nothing. Kama introduction please!


    [Kama]: Human, welcome to Temple of Tyre. I¡¯m Kama. The others are Rai and Verit. We are servants of Lord Tyre. He left us here long time ago with a duty to accomplish. We were left with a gift to bless on anyone who could carry the load of responsibility that comes with it.


    [Rai]: Kama, you are so good at sweet-talking.


    [Verit]: Shut up Rai. Let¡¯s just offer it to him. If he accepts and happens to be able to handle it, we could pass away too.


    [Kama]: He will die anyway, so the most rational way is to accept the offer.


    [Kama]: Human, do you want to live?


    I nodded with my eyes.


    [Kama, Verit, Rai]: Muol maqac yateh assay. Misec nes elimet. Teis urom texes araq. ¨C Imagine human!


    Darkness reigned my senses. I was desperate. I wanted to run but could not. It happened so that I felt powerful again. As if nothing has happened. No broken ribs, no damage to my head. Then.


    I saw it again. Those eyes. Those crimson white eyes lusting for blood. It came close to me.  It was the wolf. The one I had killed. This time, I did not feel any kind of threat from it. It told me ¡°I curse you¡±.  I lost consciousness again.


    [Verit]: It¡¯s seems this time we found the one.


    [Rai]: It did not come out of his body, so I reckon, its success.


    [Kama]: He is alive, and he fused with it.


    [Rai]: We are to meet our lord now. Before we leave this world behind, if you all agree I want to pass on Ulfberht to this kid.


    [Verit]: Stop talking nonsense.


    [Kama]: It seems I¡¯m going first. I feel the bliss. ¡°Lord Tyre accept your slave, I have done what You ordered me to do¡±. (Kama is lost from sight)


    [Verit]: Rai, it is my turn now. ¡°Lord Tyre accept your slave, I have done what You ordered me to do¡±.


    [Rai]: Ulfberht, I¡¯m going to eternal sleep. I leave you here with this kid to roam around. Help him, and serve him. If he is able to fuse with Lord¡¯s gift, he should be able to control you too.


    A small cut appears on Aslan¡¯s body, drop of blood leaves his body, floats into air and drops on Ulfberht.


    Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    [Ulfberht]: The contract is complete.


    [Rai]: ¡°Lord Tyre accept your slave, I have done what You ordered me to do¡±.


    I woke up feeling terrifying amount of power in me. I could see in darkness. I looked around. I remember torches burning, there was no trace left of them. I was in the initial place I crawled from river. I knew something had happened, but couldn¡¯t remember exact details. There was a big sword laying besides me. Its widths was around 15-16 inches. It didn¡¯t have a scabbard on it. I touched it out of curiosity.


    Stood up. River was flowing and I could see dead bodies floating on it. I decided to climb the wall. I looked up and couldn¡¯t see any light coming, but there was no other option. As I wanted to leave the place.


    [-]: Where the hell are you going without me?


    [Me]: Who is that? (I looked around, there was no living being, only dead bodies floating)


    [-]: I¡¯m the one asking the questions. Now, where the hell are you going without me?


    My senses were strengthen too. I could feel and hear waves of water clashing dead bodies, but could not located this sound which was talking to me.


    [Me]: Who are you?


    [-]: I¡¯m Ulfberht. You should refer to me as Lord Ulfberht.


    [Me]: How come we can communicate when no actual sound is released from any place around? Where are you?


    [Ulfberht]: I¡¯m here. In front of you. Don¡¯t you see me?


    There was only sword there.


    [Me]: Ulfberht, are you a sword?


    [Ulfberht]: Lord Ulfberht! I¡¯m not a sword. I¡¯m the sword. We have a contract by blood which was initiated by my old master. That¡¯s why I can directly contact you without spewing words out of mouth.


    [Me]: Who was your old master?


    [Ulfberht]: It does not matter. You are my partner now. Take me!


    I took Ulfberht with just one hand. It emitted light and turned into silver ring with small but beautiful black diamonds on it.


    [Ulfberht]: This is the only time I¡¯m changing my form to anything other than my original sword design. Let¡¯s leave this goddamned place. I¡¯m starving for action.


    I began to climb the wall. I pulled my body up with just bare arm strength that helped me to jump meters forward. I began to feel hungry and my power was fading away as I was climbing. Though the pace was fast. Ulfberht told to me keep climbing like this for an hour more and we should be able to reach the top.


    I could see the light. It gave me a bit more hope and I increased my pace a bit more. I reached top, crawled out of the Devil¡¯s Canyon. It was a miracle. On my right side there was a bridge. Facing me was a big fort. I began to walk to its main gate. It was majestic, design wise.


    Ulfberht transformed back into its sword form. Its color was matte black. Its length was almost 5¡¯6. I took it with my right hand, placed it on my right shoulder. Three warriors came out of the gate and rushed to me. I stopped.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Aslan. I¡¯m from the original village, and belong to Kali¡¯s tribe.


    [-]: Are you going to argue that Retnus mountain is in Devil¡¯s Canyon too?


    [Me]: Take a look at gates. They are still liquid in form. It does not accept me as a threat, why do you?


    Second warrior stepped up and...


    [-]: Nuve, I¡¯ll be handling this. I¡¯m Igdes. These two are fellow warriors, Nuve and Hener.


    I nodded as in appreciation.


    [Igdes]: I have never seen anybody, human or demon, coming out of Devil¡¯s Canyon alive or dead. Would you mind telling us how come you ended up there?


    [Me]: We were on the 1st bridge when it happened¡­ (I told them in details how I fall down and what was there, up to what happened there and how I crawled into entrance of where it was. I skipped that part and didn¡¯t tell anything about it as I remembered nothing in particular. I avoided the wolf dream too. I told them I saw this sword there and took it with me.)¡­ It was a miracle.


    [Nuve]: We are near 3rd bridge and it¡¯s 6th of Levi today. You expect me to believe that you have lived on nothing but water?


    [Me]: I told you, I take it as a miracle that I¡¯m alive.


    [Hener]: If I¡¯m not mistaken a merchant called Ricat is in fort selling potions and herbs. We could verify his story with him.


    Nuve came up to me.


    [Nuve]: Give me your sword.


    I put my sword on ground.


    He tried a lot but couldn¡¯t lift Ulfberht. This attracted Igdes and Hener¡¯s attention. Hener tried but nothing changed.


    [Igdes]: Take your sword and come with us.


    [Nuve]: Igdes, what the hell?! He is fishy, don¡¯t you see that?


    [Igdes]: Let¡¯s go!


    [Nuve]: Wait, wait! How come you lift the sword easily as if it is nothing and we can¡¯t?


    [Me]: I don¡¯t know.


    Next: Chapter 11 - By my hand...</a>

 Chapter 11 - By my hand...

    Chapter 11 ¨C By my hand¡­


    The brigade looking after the protection of 3rd bridge was called ¡°Band of Elas¡° and it¡¯s commander was my father¡¯s first cousin, Ule. He taller than my father. You could see scars on his arms and a deep one on his face beginning at forehead up his right eye and ending just after his cheek. Ule, told me that I looked like my father when he was young. Nuve changed his opinion after he saw Ule being friendly with me but insisted on a checkup by a mage so that to verify if I was who I argued to be. Ricat reached BoE headquarters in soon.


    [Ricat]: Dear you are alive. I thought you were killed after being thrown to Devil¡¯s Canyon.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll be in your care, until we reach Mehn.


    [Ricat]: I always respect contracts signed by me, written or verbal. We should sent a mail to your family about your story. They would be worried as I had earlier sent them a letter regarding your ¡®death¡¯.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll.


    [Ricat]: You being alive will reach their ears before the mail though. I do not know whether you are aware of it but you are a legend now. First man. No. no. First human being to survive the Devil¡¯s Canyon. Kid I¡¯ll give you 5 gold a month as a scholarship as much as you study in Mehn Academy.


    [Me]: Thank you.


    [Ricat]: Alright, let¡¯s go. We have to eat and sleep. Early tomorrow we are leaving to Mehn. I¡¯ll personally take you to Academy.


    [Nuve]: Where the hell do you think you are taking him?


    [Ule]: Warrior Nuve who gave you permission to talk?


    Nuve stayed silent.


    [Ule]: He should eat his meal with me, afterwards I¡¯ll send him to you.


    Ricat nodded. (Later on, I learned that all this 5 gold a month scholarship and stuff like sucking up to me on the 1st bridge was Ricat¡¯s methodology as he saw me as a spring-board in getting close relationship with warriors, or so I felt)


    We had a meal together. Ule asked me about my sword. I didn¡¯t lie to him but avoided telling the truth. He questioned me about everything. Igdes and Nuve were present all the time. A mage came into the room. He asked me to put my hands on a crystal ball to check if I was possessed by some kind of demon. I came clean out of everything.


    [Ule]: Mage tells that you have big mana capacity.


    [Me]: I know. Physically, I¡¯m very strong too. But I¡¯m inexperienced art of war and magic. Having something and being able to use it are totally different things. I¡¯m doing my best to avoid any kind of attention seeking. (Lesson learnt)


    [Ule]: Hahaa. You are total opposite of your father. He was a show off. Womanizer.


    [Me]: He has instructed me properly in those matters. I do not have enough experience yet.


    All three of them laughed.


    Igdes made a proposition that left me in shock.


    [Igdes]: In old times there was no academy. You made an achievement, and you got your reward. I propose, Aslan to be tattooed on his right arm for the bravery shown in defense of 1st bridge with a reference to killing a wolf and on his left hand for getting out of Devil¡¯s Canyon alive.


    Ule looked at Nuve.


    [Nuve]: I second that! Kid deserves it!


    [Ule]: I accept the proposal as worthy of his achievements. Nuve take Aslan and make sure he gets what he deserves.


    Inside part of my right forearm was tattooed with picture of sword, wings and wolf. Meaning bravery took over fear of death.


    On top of my left hand a sword cutting a devil¡¯s face into two showing her true self and human form was drawn. There was a proverb from old language called ¡°Dictum factum¡± written near the hilt of sword. Meaning what is said is done. Referring to my courage.


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    In the morning we left for Mehn. By the end of Levi we were supposed to arrive at Mehn city. It was fun till Mehn. I got to see different villages, learnt of different customs. This part of journey taught me more than anything.


    Mehn was amazing. It wasn¡¯t like any other place that I had been to. Multicultural city. King Dar, was a wise man indeed. He had built the city near the lake and built a harbor that made the city into a transit point between east and west. At any point, there were 150 warriors who have proved themselves in different battles stationed in city for protection. Mehn Academy was built to increase the defending potential in case of potential problems in future.


    I am not going to argue that Dar was the greatest or wisest tribe elder. Because there were ones before him who were much smarter and stronger than him but none had done what he did. They all could do it, why didn¡¯t they? Kali was a legend who has killed a dragon, he could conquer whole continent but didn¡¯t. I did not know the exact answer but there had to be a reason. I didn¡¯t want to fill my head with unimportant questions such as those, so began to enjoy the beauty of Mehn.


    Ricat toured me around Mehn. He showed me to his house which was bigger than Taham¡¯s. He had a small family. Beautiful wife. Two daughters. One of them was around my age, second one around 4 or 5 years old. Saye was few years younger than Ricat, but much kinder than him. Elise was a lot smaller than me in height but she would be a bomb in future. White hair, blue eyes, beautiful face. She was going to join Mehn Academy this year. She wanted to be a mage.


    He told me to stay in his house for next 2 days. He was going to have a banquet tomorrow night. He had maids and servants running around. He was checking out if all the invitation cards were delivered. Next morning, after breakfast, he left us all to visit the city and to invite some big shots.


    City life was attractive. I saw the beautiful part of it from first moment. I enjoyed it. The good life I mean.


    I left Saye and Elise, went to the yard. Backside of the house had a lounge for parties. You could have 300 guest and still have enough place to move around easily. The main yard was located besides the lounge. Trees were packed at the end of the yard before that walls. It gave a feeling of a forest. The rest was lawn. Very well trimmed lawn. Elegantly cut stones were put on lawn to give the authentic look.


    I stepped on stones, went all the way to the forest. Sat there in lotus position. Began to meditate. I felt at peace again. I opened my eyes. Elise was standing in front of me.


    [Elise]: What were you doing?


    [Me]: Meditating.


    [Elise]: Is it fun?


    [Me]: I enjoy it; I get satisfaction.


    [Elise]: Would you teach me?


    [Me]: I would love to, but I¡¯m not sure if I can. Next months you would be taught about it in Mehn Academy.


    [Elise]: We were¡­


    Saye called out to her. She made a sorry face, turned and left.


    Though Ricat was a stingy man, he was very well respected person in Mehn. He lost his parents when he was young. Got into street trade at an early age. Learnt tricks and shenanigans of trade in a fast pace. By 20 years of age, he owned two shops in Mehn city. Married Saye when he was 26. He was 40 now, had lots of properties in Mehn. He was friend of Halim. Nobody knew how they had met, but in case Halim gets to be the next king, he was the only candidate be the Minister of Trade and Finance. For a well-connected and rich person, he had a flaw. Every year, he would travel to the king¡¯s birth village and back to be able to trade in the streets again. He felt alive that way.


    Elise came back and took me by my hand¡­


    Next: Chapter 12 - Guild of Elas</a>

 Chapter 12 - Guild of Elas

    Chapter 12 ¨C Guild of Elas.


    We ran to lounge, Saye was waiting for us over there. She told me to go to dressing room to get new clothes for party. Professional hairdressers and representatives of some big name brand boutiques were present. I refused to wear anything but my tribal clothing, so they arranged tribal costumes but with their ¡®touch¡¯ on it.


    Ricat, Saye and Elise were welcoming guest personally, and house door. Expensive look carriages with extraordinary designs brought the merchant elite of Mehn to Ricat¡¯s manor. The lounge was packed. There was band singing the smoothest tunes which I had ever heard.


    There were 20 kids around our age. All of them knew each other. Elise introduced me to all of them. For them I became the main interest of night, after I told them how I had killed wolf. The girls were more influenced than boys. Later I told them about the incident at 1st bridge, my fight with demons and how I was thrown to Devil¡¯s Canyon. Even boys began to take interest in my stories as they began to recognize who I am. Ricat was right, my name was known all over the kingdom before we left the 3rd bridge.  Roia, the girl with red hair noticed tattoo on my left hand. She took my left hand with both her hands¡­


    [Roia]: Does it mean woman are evil?


    [Me]: No, it¡¯s just a reference to Devil¡¯s real and human form. Sword cutting it into two means that I have beaten Devil¡¯s Canyon.


    [Roia]: You have an interesting life.


    Elise took her hands off mine.


    [Elise]: It¡¯s not proper of a lady to act like that Roia.


    [Roia]: Is it proper keep him for yourself?


    Both of them stared at me, I smiled and excused myself and went to bathroom. I sneaked out of bathroom to yard. I sat there to breathe a bit and later on to join the rest.


    [Roia]: You are the shy guy!


    She sat on my left. Our bodies touched.


    [Me]: I¡¯m just not used to these. (I raised my left arm. My fist looking up and thumb referring in lounge¡¯s direction)


    [Roia]: You are going to get used to it in time.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll stay in academy dorms.


    [Roia]: I¡¯ll invite you to parties against your will. I will send people to get you.


    [Me]: You are bully! (We both laughed)


    [Roia]: I¡¯ll be attending Mehn academy too. I want to be a mage.


    [Me]: Why all girls want to be a mage?


    [Roia]: You expect me to wield Ulfberht and run around screaming ¡°Come at me you demons!¡± ?


    [Me]: Hahahaaa¡­ How you know about Ulfberht? I haven¡¯t shown it to you?


    [Roia]: I have a network of spies collecting information about you after you emerged from Devil¡¯s Canyon.


    [Me]: Roia, I¡¯m getting scared!


    Our fingers touched. She blushed. Everything was going according to my father¡¯s teaching until Elise emerged god know from where and kissed me on my left cheek. She was smiling.


    [Elise]: I drank wine! You want some?


    I do not remember what happened afterwards in details. But I did enjoy wine. Days passed by.


    Early in the morning, Ricat took us to Mehn Academy. It was like a city within a city. Training grounds, buildings, dorms, small shops etc. It was made so that students living in the Mehn Academy wouldn¡¯t need to go out and could satisfy their needs within academy grounds. There was around 2000 new students. 50 of them including me were on scholarship. The rest did pay for their tuition. Students who came from different parts of kingdom were eligible to stay in Mehn Academy dorms. Half of the students who enrolled in academy were sons, daughters or relatives of new classes which emerged with the creation of Kingdom of Kali. Those included but not limited to were merchants, traders, real estate owners, court courtesans, amirs, ministers and people who had influential posts in different ministries and so on goes the list. A human society, never fails to humor me. Those kids were never meant to go on kingdom¡¯s frontier¡¯s to fight to defend but it was a social status for them. Nevertheless, Mehn Academy was not just limited to teaching art of war or magic though there were only 2 options to choose from. Warrior or mage. We could study arts, philosophy, history, political science, mathematics, public administration, law etc. Having a certificate of accomplishment from


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.Mehn Academy meant a lot to those who were not meant to be at war zone.


    Each year before the summer holidays, there was a tournament to decide who was the strongest in school. After the tournament, ceremony was held for senior year students who graduated and few of the students (freshman, sophomore or junior) with excellent grades and/or abilities were given tasks and sent to different ministries, or bridges or provinces for summer holidays. That¡¯s what I looked forward most.


    Kali came from land of Tat¡¯s. He didn¡¯t come here with just warriors by his side. He had brought some customs and knowledge of the old world with him too. Until kingdom was established by Dar, most of this knowledge was used just by us and for us. After the Kingdom of Kali was found some of our knowledge and practices were used in kingdom¡¯s daily life or as part of road map that they created for its longevity. Dating system was one of these. We had 13 months in a single year. They were named after Kali and 12 martyrs that died with him while killing the dragon. Those were 1 ¨C Kali, 2 ¨C Arkam, 3 ¨C Mut, 4 ¨C Elas, 5 ¨C Wuey, 6 ¨C Ram, 7 ¨C Levi, 8 ¨C Onylys, 9 ¨C Lain, 10 ¨C Scrupp, 11 ¨C Ding, 12 ¨C Fay, 13 ¨C Elaisis. It was year 1508.


    I parted my ways with Elise, as she going to be staying at home. She was sad for me leaving their side to stay in form. Ricat, reminded me again that I should come over to his house at least once a month to stay overnight and collect my scholarship. I thanked him and left to dorms. There were three main dorms. Sophomore and junior students of those dorms had rivalry between each other for the honor of the dorm that they were representing and I was not interested in their feud. But they had different idea about me. There were doing their best to recruit me, damned reputation. Each dorm had male and female sectors. I joined ¡°Guild of Elas¡±.


    Next: Chapter 13 - master it.</a>

 Chapter 13 – master it.

    Chapter 13 - master it.


    We had R.A. It stood for either resident administrator or resident assistant. One was assigned to show me around. His name was Eliar. He was son of a rich merchant, he came from far away and his father didn¡¯t trust him to live alone so he had ended up in dorms. He was in his 3rd year of studies. He had magic as his major and was focused on public administration. He wanted to work for province government while his younger brother run the family business. He was kind of a guarantee for their family business¡¯s future.


    [Eliar]: We have 4 floors in each building. Freshman to senior year students live on each level accordingly. You are going to be living in 1st floor while I will be on 3rd floor this year. There are 20 rooms that can host up to 2 students in each level. Sometimes you won¡¯t get a roommate.  Each room has its own bathroom and shower; we eat our meals together in dorm kitchen where girls and boys are mixed. You can visit girls sector until 6 p.m. You have to be back to dorm by 10 p.m. or you will have problems.


    [Me]: Which room am I assigned to?


    [Eliar]: We will go to administrator¡¯s office for that. They will assign a room to you and will sign you as the owner. By the way, are those real?


    [Me]: You mean tattoos?


    [Eliar]: Yeah!


    [Me]: I got them when we were at 3rd bridge. Commander of ¡°Band of Elas¡± ordered it to be drawn after a warrior from same group brought up the idea as a reward.


    [Eliar]: Have you really got out of Devil¡¯s Canyon?


    [Me]: Yes.


    [Eliar]: I was told that you killed an army of demons and wounded Demon Lord, what about that?


    [Me]: T-t-that¡¯s a lie.


    We reach administrator¡¯s office.


    [Eliar]:  Missy we are here to get Aslan registered to receive permission to use a room.


    I was assigned to room 108. I had no roommate, and all the room to myself. By 5, I had my stuff packed into cupboard and dressers. The funny thing was, if I didn¡¯t have to use a key to open or close the room. I just had to give a command and door will ¡°act¡± accordingly. Magic is a great thing.


    Knock. Knock.


    [Me]: Come in.


    Door opened. Mariette came in. Her eyes got teary. I stood up. Tears came from her eyes. I took a few steps and she hugged me closely.


    [Mariette]: I thought I lost you.


    I patted her head.


    [Me]: I didn¡¯t know you feel¡­


    She put her finger on my lips. We began to kiss. 15 minutes to 6 she left. Eliar came by after 6 and we went to kitchen to eat.


    I saw Mariette sitting with few other girls and winked at her. She smiled. We got our meals and¡­


    [Me]: Eliar thanks for everything. I¡¯ll be leaving now.


    [Eliar]: You got friends here?


    [Me]: Yeah.


    [Eliar]: All right, then after meal, I want to introduce you to some of my friends.


    [Me]: No worries.


    I went to table where Mariette and girls were sitting. I sat in front of Mariette. The other girls looked shocked.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    [Me]: You feeling better now?


    [Mariette]: Much better!


    [Mariette]: She is Sylph, my roommate. They are her childhood friends.


    [Me]: Nice to meet you Sylph. Hey, girls! I¡¯m Aslan.


    [Sylph]: Is he your boyfriend?


    Mariette blushed.


    [Mariette]: We are just friends.


    Girls grinned.


    [Me]: What classes are you going to attend?


    [Mariette]: Magic, public administration, philosophy and law. You?


    [Me]: Art of War, Magic, history and philosophy. We are going to attend Magic and philosophy together!


    [Mariette]: You got tattoos!!! Congrats!


    [Me]: Thanks.


    [Mariette]: Did you kill an army of demons and wounded Demon Lord?


    [Me]: Who spreads that BS?


    The other girls gazed in awe. I finished my meal and left them. Went back to my room. Sat on ground and began to


    meditate. Close to 11, went to bed and slept.


    I was dreaming of my village and parents. Everything went dark. Wolf appeared out of nowhere. ¡°How¡¯s life treating you?¡±. I didn¡¯t know what was happening. ¡°Enjoy while you can, as there is not so much time left.¡±


    I woke up unaware of what had happened. Went to main school building registered for classes. Next Monday, school was officially beginning studies. Days passed by fast.  First three days of week we had theoretical stuff to learn. Thursday and Friday¡¯s were practical lessons. Magic was the first lesson for day to all students. Next two classes were the elective ones for me. The last one was art of war. I tried my best to study hard.


    In magic class, first thing was to get official results to know which kind of mana affiliation we had. I had wind and fire affiliation. I showed them how I engulfed my in mana, everyone was shocked but not even teacher knew how could it happen. I teleported and they told me it was categorized as a sage level magic and most would not even dream of being able to teleport. Philosophy and history were informative classes. Art of War was different though. They asked us to choose what we wanted to use as a weapon and divided students according their weapons and instructors for each weapon had their own classes. Art of War didn¡¯t have much theory classes on first and second year of studies. We were told everything would be as practical as possible. First few days we just practiced handling our weapons efficiently. Ulfberht¡¯s size was too massive to be used in a same manner as a small blade would so instructor told me to check out normal moves and apply those moves while using Ulfberht. The difference between any blade and Ulfberht was that it weighed close to nothing in my hands. It was like moving my leg or arm. The problematic part was I had to train a lot to be able to master it.


    Next: Chapter 14 - Cowardice!</a>

 Chapter 14 - Cowardice!

    Chapter 14 ¨C Cowardice!


    That night again I had the same nightmare. This time it was a bit different than last. Darkness was everywhere. It felt like I was floating on it. I hadn¡¯t lost the sense of direction though. A cube made out of glass appeared out of nowhere. I felt 2 different presences. Inside cube, wolf was going wild. It was running around, hitting glass to break out of it. The second existence didn¡¯t showed itself, but I felt as if it was the one who helped me out when I was meditating in cave at Retnus Mountain. Wolf recognized me¡­


    [Wolf]: We meet again.


    [Me]: What are you here?


    [Wolf]: I¡¯m the result of what you imagined when you were blessed with the gift.


    [Me]: Yours eyes seems to lust for blood but feel lonely.


    Wolf got angered at my words. It went to the middle of cube and sat in a sleeping position. Its tail came all the way to its head. For the last time:


    [Wolf]: I¡¯ll take over when time is right. When that time comes these walls want to be able to handle me anymore. Get lost!


    I slowly opened my eyes. I stayed in bed for a few more minutes. I stood up and changed my clothes. It was still dark and moon was ruling over the sky. I began to run. Daily training helped me to be at my top condition at all times. I did few laps around the dorms. Heard some kind of singing in my head. I thought I had headache so went back and entered males sector. Went to my room. Heard voices coming out of it. Listened carefully, from inside some kind of musing sounds were coming, as if somebody was trying to sing. I whispered ¡°open¡± and the door unlocked. I opened it carefully and went in¡­


    [Ulfberht]: My loooooooooove. I am lonelyyyyyyyy. (It was singing)


    [Me]: You suck at singing Ulfberht.


    [Ulfberht]: I was not singing. By the way, it¡¯s Lord Ulfberht.


    [Me]: There is no shame in it. Stop denying. It¡¯s just you suck at it.


    [Ulfberht]: You seem troubled.


    [Me]: Yeah, I have few problems.


    [Ulfberht]: Do not worry about the puppy.


    [Me]: What puppy?


    [Ulfberht]: The wolf. It does not mean any harm to you. Last time when you kissed with Mariette, it was cheering for you. Howled a bit. Hahaaa¡­


    [Me]: You know about the Wolf?


    [Ulfberht]: Of course!


    [Me]: Would you please tell me more about what is wolf and what it is doing inside me?


    [Ulfberht]: Maybe!? If¡­


    [Me]: If what?


    [Ulfberht]: If you admit that I have beautiful voice!


    Ulfberht was childish.


    [Me]: You have beautiful voice Ulfberht.


    [Ulfberht]: Good. When the spell was recited to bless you with the gift, they asked you to imagine. Most probably you have imagined the wolf you had killed back when you were a shepherd. So the gift has taken its form as of wolf and happened to take its personality after what you thought wolf was all about. It couldn¡¯t be blood lusty as it didn¡¯t know what bloodlust is. So good or bad, it¡¯s all your fault.


    [Me]: Lord Ulfberht, may I ask you another question?


    [Ulfberht]: Yes. You may Aslan. (This shitty sword had a thing for being praised. It had a wicked personality)


    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    [Me]: I¡¯m having trouble with handling you. I do not know what kind of sword mastery I should learn to be able to wield you perfectly.


    [Ulfberht]: You know how you do imagine/want and mana engulfs your body.


    [Me]: Yes.


    [Ulfberht]: When you take me into your arms imagine that I¡¯m part of you too. During I¡¯ll be changing my form accordingly and you will be a sword master in a moment. There is no need to learn any martial arts because after we sync properly for first time you will have them learnt and engraved to your dumb and empty brain for good.


    [Me]: Thank you, Lord Ulfberht.


    He began to sing again. It was annoying.


    I went to classes. For the next year I learned how to fly (wind affiliation) and make fireballs and throw them around. I wasn¡¯t the best magus candidate but was better than most. I just didn¡¯t have that much of interest in magic. Philosophy and history were fun. I learned how to handle Ulberht properly. Its original form is massive but during the fight while changing its trajectory it could minimize its size and get big again as if reading my mind. I met Roia, Mariette and Elise regularly. Didn¡¯t make that much of friends on my first year, as I was soo into training that I tried to avoid anything else. Basic¡¯s had to be perfected. 5th of Elaisis we celebrated my birthday. I was 14 now. My build didn¡¯t change that much, I was skinny muscular type now. My height didn¡¯t increase either. Days passed by fast.


    It was 8th of Arkam, and we were told to sign up for school wide tournament if we wanted to participate. On 30th of Mut, tournament winner will be announced to public and first week of Elas graduation will take place and limited number of students will be sent to as interns to respective stations of workplace by the 25th of Elas. 30th of the Elas, annual full moon will take place.


    In philosophy class we had a hot debate about the number of issues but the most intriguing was mine with another fellow students called Asim. It was about saving people in extreme situations. He was son of some high court courtesan and looked down on everybody.


    [Asim]: It is illogical to save a kid from a high level demon in our state as it now.


    [Me]: Why?


    [Asim]: Because, we wouldn¡¯t be able to save it. Moreover we would be killed too. Don¡¯t you understand if we leave then there will be only 1 casualty, but if we got ourselves involved the toll will increase to 2 deaths. Which option should you choose?


    [Me]: Let me rephrase a bit. If that kid was your close kind, let¡¯s say your little brother. Would you still chose not to be involved in it?


    [Asim]: Of course, I would try to save my brother. That¡¯s brother what you are talking about.


    [Me]: In that case the death toll would be 2. But I don¡¯t care about that. What I want to know is does your brother as a fellow human being is more important than somebody else who is not related to you? Is it right to compare humans and value them? The reasoning what you refer to as logical in simple words of us, the village people, is called none other than cowardice!


    Next: Chapter 15 - Black</a>

 Chapter 15 - Black.

    Chapter 15 ¨C Matte Black.


    The only freshman who signed up for the tournament was me. The reason being most did not think they were ready to battle sophomore and junior year students. Roia tried to change my mind, but I stood firm and told her that I want to be a warrior and no demon or beast man is going to tell me that I¡¯m not fit to fight him or her so I should leave and come back next year. Winning or losing meant nothing to me, I had to participate.


    60 warriors and mages were divided into 2 groups of 30 and had 1 on 1 battle until one wo/man left standing. Every day battle were held and any participant could only fight a battle a day. Losing meant disqualification.


    Arena for tournament was much bigger than we had in our village. It was rectangular in shape. Its borders were cover in walls with heighted up to 12 meters and 5 meters in width. People could stand on them and watch the battle. Inside part of the arena where actual battle happened was covered with invisible magic that made sure that magical attacks would stay within arena. We weren¡¯t fighting to death but I was told that accidents has happened in past.


    My first match was against a junior with a negative reputation of losing every single fight that he has had in tournament from his initial attendance. He had a kampilan as main sword and kalis as a shortsword kept in its scabbard. I had Ulfberht with me. We faced each other in distance of 20 meters. That was provided to give a chance to magician type fighters¡¯ equal standing against warrior type fighters who relied on hard weapons rather than magic alone.


    My opponent was smiling. He thought he was lucky to face a freshman and his reputation of a straight loser will be over this year. I hit the ground with Ulfberht and he got stuck there. Ulfberht was cursing me and flooding my mind with his unbelievable selfish and pointless arguments. I concentrated and shut him off. My opponent had both his arms up in air as if he won the battle. He was careless. I teleported to his left. He was in shock though got over it in a second and tried to slash me. But he was late. He was full of openings. I hit him hard in the face with my fist. I think his jaw cracked. He was knocked out with a simple punch. Everybody began to cheer, scream and applause. I did put a show. Only people in my practical magic class new about me being able to teleport and most of them didn¡¯t know what it was about at all and seen it only once. I had way too many cards in my sleeve to lose in the first round. Unlucky guy the opponent was. By the way, that match is still considered the shortest fight ever to occur in a tournament in Mehn Academy¡¯s history.


    Elise and Roia were watching with their parents. Mariette was with some girls from school.


    There were 3 days for tournament to end. I had won most of my matches easily. My biggest advantage was that I faced warrior types and Ulfberht was an amazing weapon which did break their swords and spears or cut through their shields in 2-3 consecutive attacks. 8 participants remained and 5 of them were magician type warriors. I still couldn¡¯t perceive how they managed to last. The other seven were junior level students.


    My opponent this time was a guy called Rifel. He was short. So short that you would need a magnifying glass to know that he existed. I¡¯m just joking. He was around 5¡¯2¡±. He had a talwar as his main sword. I could see he had something like a short sword katar up in his right and left leg sleeves. He seemed dangerous. As the signal was given we rushed towards each other. Our swords clashed. He was fast and agile. I still couldn¡¯t use Ulfberht properly. Rifel was aiming at my vital points as it took time to change course of the Ulfberht swing due to its massive size. I shouldn¡¯t have underestimated my opponent. I was losing ground as time passed. I changed my strategy to break his talwar and for him to use katars. I was lucky again. Even though his talwar was made of some expensive material it could not keep up with Ulfberht. After his talwar broke, he stood shocked and admitted defeat without continuing.


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    [Me]: Why the hell did you gave up?


    [Rifel]: If somebody as clueless as you about sword fighting breaks my sword then I have no right to continue. I come from north-east, but we belong to same tribe. You should know that what is honor to a warrior.


    [Me]: I nodded.


    I felt disgusted. It was Ulfberht who was winning fights not me. I felt helpless and hopeless. I went back to my room without watching other fights. I had a shower. Came out. Lied on bed.


    [Ulfberht]: You seem troubled kid.


    [Me]: I am.


    [Ulfberht]: What¡¯s the reason?


    [Me]: It¡¯s you Ulfberht. It¡¯s you who is winning most of the fights. I¡¯m useless. I¡¯m not qualified.


    [Ulfberht]: Qualified for what?


    [Me]: Qualified to have you, Ulfberht. I believe you are great sword but I shouldn¡¯t be the one to wield you. I¡¯m planning to quit tournament and approach village council in summer holidays to give you up to them so that they find a proper warrior suitable for you.


    [Ulfberht]: Stop spitting BS! Now listen to me.


    I was thinking.


    [Ulfberht]: Lord Ulfberht to idiot! Lord Ulfberht to idiot! Do you read me?


    I laughed. He was always referring to himself as Lord Ulfberht.


    [Ulfberht]: I think it¡¯s time you learnt.


    [Me]: Learned what?


    [Ulfberht]: Sit down and begin to meditate.


    I did as I was told. I sat in lotus position. Breathed in and out slowly. It seemed as if I¡¯m in some village in from of a blacksmith. I entered it. There was a tall blonde woman. She was putting the last touches on a gigantic sword. A tall blonde man entered the blacksmith.


    [-]: Magnhild, my love, did you finish what I asked you for?


    [Magnhild]: Ulfberht, it¡¯s almost ready.


    [Ulfberht]: It¡¯s the last time my love.


    [Magnhild]: You always say that. We should leave this goddamn place. We should go to some faraway place, live a long life and have many kids.


    [Ulfberht]: We will my love. We will.


    (Scene changes into a war) Ulfberht is killing hundreds so elegantly as if he is dancing. He uses no shields or anything else. A big gigantic sword. As time pass, tides of war change. Gods began to favor the other side. Their side loses very badly, and wounded Ulfberht tries to go back to village. He can¡¯t make out of the forest though. Dies there and his soul transfers into the sword turning its color to matte black.


    Next: Chapter 16 - Hunter Valley</a>


    P.S: Do not forget to rate/comment/suggest etc.

 Chapter 16 - Hunter Valley

    Chapter 16 ¨C Hunter Valley.


    I woke up next morning. Had breakfast. Today was the day two last finalists would be known. There were lots of people attending to watch the fights. Out of nowhere Roia jumped up, hugged me. As we were walking to pre-fight room, she locked her left arm to my right arm.


    [Roia]: I expect you to win today.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll give my best.


    She kissed me on right cheek and told me it¡¯s a pre-fight stimulus. She has prepared a special package to be present to me if I win the today¡¯s battle.


    There were 2 male contestants and 2 female ones left. I would be facing Zara in todays match. She was a beautiful brunette who was a junior year student in our academy, and Roia¡¯s eldest cousin.


    Signal was given. I used both my hands to control Ulfberht. I had my right leg up in front and left one the same level with my shoulders. I bended a little and began to pour mana out of my body. Zara had her hands up(palms facing herself) and chanted some spell. Earth began to vibrate and arrows made of rocks began to emerge from ground and levitate on air. She turned hands in opposite and with her index fingers pointed at me chanted something again and hundreds of arrows started to fly towards me.


    I concentrated and felt as if Ulfberht was part of me. My body kind of burst an amazing amount of mana outside in a second. Boom. And a shockwave burst in all directions, epicenter being I, outwardly. All the arrows, which were coming at me, turned to dust. Zara had chanted a spell for a rocky wall to be emerged in front of her to survive the shockwave. The magic barrier, which protected audience, had cracked. Magicians were chanting another spell to create a second barrier. I teleported close enough to rocky wall. I used my right hand to handle the Ulfberht and placed him on my right shoulder. I brought up my left arm to shoulder lever. Formed a fist, having my thumb pressing on my index finger hard to suppress it. Released my thumb and my index finger hit the wall. It crushed and Zara fell on her knees in shock. I came by her, took her right hand with my left. Raised both my and her hand in to air. Everyone went crazy. Applauses, cries, girls were jumping around. I had won! I turned my face to Zara and told her that the last part of the fight was a gift from Roia.


    Roia met me after the battle in private. She told me I should come to her house to collect the gift for winning. I touched her nose with my thumb and put my hand on her right side of her face. I stepped forward and my fingers run through her silky hair. I kissed on her forehead and let go of her. She blushed, turned around and ran away.


    Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    [Ulfberht]: You are good!


    [Me]: You have to meet my father.


    The next day, I went to arena for final match. My opponent, a junior year student mage forfeited the match. I become the winner without even fighting the last match. On 30th of Mut, in a public ceremony my name was announced as the winner of annual tournament and I was given a certificate stamped by principal, which would later on be sent to my family.  Same day I was given notification that I would be sent as an intern to a brigade, which was protecting our south western borders and by 2nd of Elas I had to be ready to be sent off.


    I went to my room and an hour later Mariette came by. She told me she was going back to village for summer holidays. I asked her to see my family and tell them that I love them. Before she left, we hugged and kissed. She asked me to be careful during the assignment. I smiled and she left.


    [Ulfberht]: What if they talk to each other about you?


    [Me]: I told you; you have to meet my father. He has a solution for everything.


    [Ulfberht]: Hahahaa¡­


    [Me]: Ulfberht, I gotta leave you here alone for now.


    [Ulfberht]: You going to Roia¡¯s?


    [Me]: Yeah. If you wanna come over just turn to your ring form.


    He did transform and I put Ulfberht on my right pinky finger. I headed towards the Ricat¡¯s house and talked to Elise. Later on we went to Roia¡¯s family manor. I had fun time and Roia told me that the gift was not ready yet and she would be able to give it to me only after I came back to school next year. We left Roia¡¯s house late night. I escorted Elise to Ricat¡¯s mansion. She was not her usual self. It was late night. I put my hands of either side of her face. We kissed. I have never gotten so lost in a kiss before.


    Next morning I packed my stuff and went over to Public Relations Department. They send me to airport, where I had to take an express balloon to fly to village of Afcul. On 14th of Elas, I was in village of Afcul. I was greeted by a mage called Elana. She bought some herbs and potions and we left to Hunter Valley.


    P.S: I do not like long chapters, BUT this chapter was much much shorter than the usual ones I write up. The reason is I want to end up, tournament thing and move on...


    Next: Chapter 17 - Bright Light...</a>

 Chapter 17 - Bright Light...

    Chapter 17 ¨C Bright Light.


    Hunter Valley was a great place to live. It was all greenery. The villages inside the valley were mainly cultivating grapes for wine production. All over the year, merchants would come to Hunter Valley to buy raisins, wine and fresh grapes to be sent to different parts of the kingdom. I was stationed on the western outskirts of Hunter Valley bordering the jungles. I knew that Elves were living inside the jungles but have never seen one, or met somebody who had interacted with them. My father once was blabbing something about elves though I find it hard to believe to his words alone.


    The northern and southern borders of the kingdom were more suited for warriors than western borders. On south they were constantly fighting with demons and on north beast men attacked once in a while. Western border though was just too peaceful. Elves never attacked humans. We were stationed to protect the villages from wild animals that could come out of jungles. I was told that last year only disruption in their peaceful duties was that a panther came out of jungle and left back. I was sent to the only place where I wouldn¡¯t want to be.


    Although, the battalion¡¯s name was Magi Vallis which translated from old language as Magicians of the Valley the leader was a warrior called Rahul. He was of a big statue but old in age. His hair was up to his shoulders, and he had long beard with arrow tips hanging from its ends. It seemed to me as he was a great warrior who has been through many battles and was sent to lead the Magi Vallis as a retirement gift. I talked to him, though he didn¡¯t know my father, he recognized my grandfathers and was pleased to know that as a future warrior of Kali tribe I held tribal values higher than anything else, even my life.


    I was given a shift time according to which I had to be present at exact time in front of the barracks to be sent to my station where I would be patrolling the area. Shifts changed from 8am to 8pm respectively. If I was on shift from 8am to 8pm today, I would have 1 day free time and tomorrow at 8pm would have to be again on shift. It seemed easy but my sleep schedule was messed up and was feeling like a zombie for the first three-four days.


    Around 20th of Elas, my nightmares began to occur again. Each time I slept, wolf was there. Ulfberht was present too but as an observer. Third presence was similar to the one in mount Retnus. Wolf wasn¡¯t attacking the glass cube anymore, but it was walking around its inner border in a slow manner.


    Days passed by me going to shifts, coming back to barracks, running, training, improving my magic, meditating and sleeping. On 29th of Elas 5 minutes to 8 in the morning I was stationed in the post. At 13 o¡¯clock had my meal. 5 minutes to 8 at night was relieved of my duty and sent back to barracks. Had a shower, changed my cloths and went to sleep.


    This time, glass cube had big cracks on it. Wolf was staring at me and grinning.


    [Wolf]: It¡¯s almost there. Are you ready kid?


    [Me]: What¡¯s going to happen?


    I opened my eyes around 5 am on 30th of Elas. Went to run, after that did some push-ups and pull-ups. Had a shower and went to have breakfast. I was still thinking about what wolf said but couldn¡¯t figure out what it meant. Hand my lunch and had a nap for 2 hours. Woke up and waited to be called for shift. 5 minutes to 8 in the evening of 30th of Elas I was under the defense tower. I changed the mage who was off duty as of the minute when we signed on timetable regarding shift change. The defense tower was made of wood. Was around 8 meters high and had a balcony on it to be able to watch the jungles. Later on I learnt that whenever they made defense tower out of stones they would be attacked by elves to be destroyed. Interestingly, they never attacked wood structures. I was up in the top of tower. Sun was going to be replaced by moon in few hours. It summer and day was longer that night. It was almost sunset when my headaches began. It did hurt badly. Ulfberht turned into a ring and I put him on my pinky finger. I think he was trying to communicate with me but headache was so bad that I couldn¡¯t concentrate to talk to him. It got worse as seconds passed by. Moon was rising from the east. I couldn¡¯t stand on my legs properly. I was going right and left hitting the spindles made out of wood. I was going crazy because of the pain. Something shattered. I felt peace for a moment, lost my balance and fall down from the tower. I came back to my senses but I was surrounded by glass. I panicked and ran to the end and began to kick and smash the glass. Nothing changed.


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    [Ulfberht]: Calm down, Aslan.


    I turned back and saw Ulfberht.


    [Me]: What is happening Ulfberht? Where are we?


    [Ulfberht]: Inside the cube. Its full moon and wolf took over you.


    [Me]: What you mean wolf took over?


    [Ulfberht]: Calm down and try to see.


    I breathed in and out slowly for a few times and regained my composure. One of the glass walls turned into some kind of mirror and we could see what was happening.


    Wherever we were or whatever we were inside, it was moving towards the jungle. In a slow pace. I was watching as if I was in its eyes or whatever it saw was directed to glass wall instantaneously. It was like back when I got out of Temple of Tyre. It was dark but the vision was not affected. In peripheries of the vision you could identify elves. It moved as if not caring about their existence. In an instant, it changed its pace and began to run forward. It jumped in to the jungle and went berserk. It was killing everything moving. Pigs, tigers, panthers, giraffes, gazelles, deer¡¯s; whatever was on its way was brutally killed. A real bloodbath.


    It stopped as if it felt something and an arrow passed few centimeters away from it. Turned to right and saw elves again. They were up in trees. It got angry. I could feel the anger. It began to howl. Everything around began to shake.


    One of the elves fall down while jumping from a tree to another to get closer to it. It stopped howling and run towards the elf. Few more arrows came down and it dodged all of them. The first elf which I had ever seen was going to be butchered in front of my eyes. It stopped in front of the elf. The elf was terrified. I wouldn¡¯t want to be in that elf¡¯s place or situation. It didn¡¯t killed it rather began to walk around it. It was torturing the elf. It knew, and elf knew that elf is going to be killed. It just gave elf time to feel despair. Was it enjoying that? It stopped again facing elf. You could feel the melancholy of death in elf¡¯s eyes.


    A girl appeared out of nowhere, put her hand on its face (maybe nose, I was just inside the glass cube) and flash of very bright light...


    P.S: you should not be scared of doing any of these -> rate/review/comment


    Next: Chapter 18 - The Night of the Full Moon...</a>

 Chapter 18 - The Night of the Full Moon

    Chapter 18 ¨C The day of the full moon.


    ¡­Very bright light covered my vision. I put up my hand to cover my eyes to not to be blinded by the light. Light faded away slowly. I found myself out of the glass cube with Ulfberht besides me. Wolf was in the glass cube now; we had changed places somehow. It was running around, hitting the glass walls and howling.


    [-]: It¡¯s a demon! We should kill it immediately!


    [-]: It¡¯s not a demon. It has just gone berserk. Whatever was the reason for it to be doing what it has done is suppressed, and it won¡¯t pose a threat anymore.


    [-]: You may be the princess, but you are not our commander! Mages put up the strongest barrier what you know of so that this demon can¡¯t break it and get loose again. We are taking it to village.


    I went to cube and put my hand on the wall.


    [Me]: Why?


    [Wolf]: Do you expect me to sit around and do nothing? This cage makes me go crazy. I hate it. I messed up this time. But next year on full moon I¡¯ll show the world what definition of frenzy is.


    I opened my eyes. My body felt enormous. I was a wolf. Unnaturally big in comparison to a normal wolf. Some kind of magical barrier surrounded me and I was being carried away. Elves were walking just beside the barrier.


    I felt as if my body was melting away. I began to transform back into human. I began to shrink to the right size. I was naked as if it was the day I was born. I still had Ulfberht on my right pinky finger though. They halted. I could sense their confusion. My senses were godly. I could even feel their heart beats.


    I saw the girl who had popped and made that light appear. I teleported out of barrier next to that girl. She was a bit smaller than me in height. The Elven group was in shock as they lost me in the barrier. I put my hand around her neck¡­


    [Me]: Anybody moves, and she is dead!


    Everyone turned to face me. They didn¡¯t know what had happened.


    [Me]: Which way I should go to get out of jungle?


    Total silence¡­


    [Me]: All right!


    [Me]: What¡¯s your name?


    [-]: I¡¯m Alva.


    [Me]: Now Alva is going to show me around and take me out of jungle. I will leave her alone after I leave the jungle. I won¡¯t


    hurt her. Though after we leave if any of you comes to traces me or hinder me in any other manner, know that I will kill her.


    I looked at Alva. She was blushing. I have totally forgotten that I was naked. Oh God! I picked her up into my arms in a single move and¡­


    [Me]: Where to?


    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    [Alva]: Follow the baobabs.


    I began to run at incredible speeds. Sometimes slowing down a bit then increasing the speed again. It took me less than an


    hour to reach the exit. I saw the defense tower. I put Alva back on her legs.


    [Me]: Thank you!


    [Alva]: Its all-good but you cannot go on like this.


    [Me]: Like what?


    [Alva]: Going berserk. I can help you.


    [Me]: How and when?


    [Alva]: Here, every night beginning today; few hours before the dawn.


    [Me]: Why?


    [Alva]: What you mean?


    [Me]: Why you want to help me out?


    [Alva]: You need it, and we elves are noble race who help out the ones in need.


    She went away. I looked around and noticed no presence of elf or any other creature. Smell of blood was in the air. I went back to defense tower and put on spare clothes. Sun rise again from east. I went down the tower. New mage had come for duty. She signed in and I signed out. Went back to barracks. Had a shower and ate breakfast. Found Elana the same day and asked her if she can arrange a meeting with Rahul. A few hours passed and I met him.


    [Me]: Commander I want to be on duty every night beginning today. I would like you to approve my request!


    [Rahul]: Strange!?


    [Me]: What is strange commander?


    [Rahul]: You are. Nobody asks for a night duty but you do.


    I grinned.


    [Rahul]: Elana make sure that he gets to be on night shifts form now on until he leaves.


    I went back to barracks. Had a good sleep and woke up barely to be on time for my night shift. Star gazed until I saw Alva. I went up to her¡­ She was goddess of beauty reincarnated into an elf.  She had light greenish hair up to her waist. She was wearing a dark green skirt up to her feet but with a long side slit from the left side that showed her left leg while walking which I found very attractive. She had shoulder level crop top. On her head, there was a head chain made out of leaves and roots of a tree. I was in awe of her beauty.


    [Me]: Hi, and sorry for troubling you.


    [Alva]: It¡¯s all right. Now have a seat.


    We bot sat on the grass.


    [Alva]: Do you know what or who that wolf is?


    I explained her in details about what wolf told me about himself and Ulfberht¡¯s talks about the wolf. I told her about my dreams and what happened the night of the full moon¡­


    Next: Chapter 19 - To Mehn.</a>

 Chapter 19 - To Mehn.

    Chapter 19 ¨C To Mehn.


    Moreover I told Alva about the glass cube and rough explanation of what happened afterwards the light flashed.


    [Alva]: You normally go to that place either when you meditate or sleep. Am I right?


    [Me]: Yes.


    [Alva]: I¡¯ll be joining you over there too.


    [Me]: How?


    [Alva]: You should begin to meditate and I will join you in the realm which has been created within your unconscious mind. I¡¯ll do my best to help you out. The key point you have to understand that you are the one who will be making the choice.


    [Me]: I didn¡¯t get you. What you mean?


    [Alva]: You will understand, just begin to meditate.


    It took more than a month for Alva to trespass her way into my unconsciousness. During that month we exchanged information about ourselves and get to know each other in and out. She was an Elven princess. She was 16 and was going to live (if not killed) for another few hundred years. They lived in peace with the nature. They had this sense of nature that I would never grasp. She was so into it when she was talking about nature. Once, I told her that, in human society they would be categorized as an extremist religious group who worship nature.


    It was 29th of Wuey when she penetrated through all defenses of my unconscious brain. It was dark everywhere. Cube around with wolf in it. Alva was, like the sun in the darkness, illuminating light out of her body. She looked at me and later on at wolf. She took my hand and we went to the cube. Wolf opened its eyes¡­


    [Wolf]: You damned elf!


    Silence fell for few more minutes.


    [Wolf]: Why the hell have you brought her into here? The Kingdom of Darkness should not be visited by the likes of her. Aren¡¯t you ashamed, Aslan?


    [Alva]: I¡¯m here to help!


    [Wolf]: 2nd, get here out of here!


    [Alva]: Who is 2nd?


    [Me]: No idea, but I always feel another presence in here. It¡¯s like me but not me exactly. I¡¯m unsure.


    [Alva]: But there is nobody here.


    [-]: Wolfy, for once you are right. You are our problem and we solve our own problems. She shouldn¡¯t be here.


    Alva disappeared.


    [-]: Aslan, never ever let anybody else into here.


    I opened my eyes. Alva was in shock.


    [Me]: You all right?


    [Alva]: Yeah, somehow I ended up in a place which had a beautiful forest and a big hill. On top of that hill there was someone standing. I run to the hill. But got here instead. I¡¯m an elven princess and my magic and telepathy powers are much more powerful than anybody else. It was like I was thrown out¡­


    Stolen story; please report.


    She was deep in thought.


    [Alva]: I¡¯ll see you later.


    I nodded and she left in hurry. I went back to defense tower. Stargazed a bit. I knew that I have around a month and half until I leave this place. Maybe a bit more or less. I was nowhere close to know what to do with the wolf. Next time it takes over again¡­ I didn¡¯t want to think about that possibility at all. I had to do something but the question was ¡°What¡±.


    Next month or so, Alva tried her best but couldn¡¯t join me in my meditative state. I didn¡¯t want to tell her that, even if I gave her permission to enter, she wouldn¡¯t be able too. I was attached to her. I did like and wanted to be with her.


    It was 14th of Levi, when I was notified by Elana that I will departing to Mehn in 3 days. That day I would be on duty for the last time.


    Few hours before the dawn I met Alva. She had learnt few more stuff which she wanted to try. I told her that this was my last time seeing her for now as I would be sent to Mehn in few days¡¯ time. I explained to her what happened the last time, and not just her but anybody else was unwelcome in my unconsciousness.


    [Alva]: You should have told me.


    [Me]: I got scared.


    [Alva]: Scared of what?


    [Me]: I got scared that you would leave me for good. I wanted to be with you as long as I could be.


    I came close to her and with my right index finger touched her pointy ear. We had a long kiss which I will never forget.


    She turned around and left.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll come back for you! (Scream)


    Elana woke me up from my sleep. Get ready, Rahul is waiting for you. I put on my clothes and went to meet the commander.


    [Rahul]: You have shown unwavering will by attending night shifts without getting late. I know that Magi Vallis seems like the easiest battalion to serve in but that¡¯s where it gets tricky. A warrior is like a sword, if you do not use it gets rusty. You have trained well by doing basics every day.


    Elana smiled.


    [Rahul]: To honor your determination, Elana make sure that an angel with a spear and shield in his hands is tattooed in between his chest and belly. Both of you may leave now!


    It was painfull but I had to endure.


    It looked good on me though. Elana took me to Afcul village after 2 days and I flew back to Mehn.


    Next: Chapter 20 - Come at me!</a>

 Chapter 20 – Come at me!

    Chapter 20 ¨C Come at me!


    I wasn¡¯t that familiar with the city to begin with. Few new buildings had been built up in in Mehn in my absence. On my second year of the studies I had two important goals to accomplish. First and foremost was the wolf. I had to find out a way to solve it out for good. Second was to have a proper school life. I didn¡¯t know anyone. I wasn¡¯t part of anything. If there was some kind of social activities, festivals happening in or around the academy, I wasn¡¯t aware of them. Anything else that I achieved throughout the year was to be taken as additional reward(s).


    Orientation was taking place. School was packed with students, their friends and families. I went to dormitory, namely ¡°Guild of Elas¡±.


    It was summer and I was just wearing a vest, which covered my backside but my arms and front side of my body could be seen. Had regular pants and leather shoes. Tattoos were not covered and people could tell that I had them. Those tattoos on me or on any other warrior were drawn so that others could see them, and the ones with enough knowledge could identify more or less where and what you have done to deserve the tattoo. Moreover tattoos were to be engraved on bodies of warriors from tribe of Kali. Knowledge of tattooing was limited to our tribe.


    As I was entering the dormitory, Eliar met me at dorm entrance.


    [Eliar]: Damn it!


    [Me]: Hello to you to Eliar.


    [Eliar]: Man, we have to send the portaits back to be painted again.


    [Me]: I¡¯m doing great, what about you?


    [Eliar]: Get to your room and pack your stuff.


    I saw my portrait in the hall. Actually anyone who entered the dorm would see the portrait.


    [Me]: What¡¯s this?


    [Eliar]: That¡¯s your portrait. Yours truly (He bended his arm towards himself in a high-society manner), proposed the idea.


    [Me]: Why would you do something like this?


    [Eliar]: Aslan, I think you do not quite understand but it¡¯s not year 1156 anymore. We are living in 16th century. You don¡¯t get to see a 14 year old with these (points at my tattoos) anymore. You are a legend. We, members of the ¡°Guild of Elas¡±, know how to take care of our heroes. The main reason though was to take revenge!


    [Me]: Revenge for what?


    [Eliar]: I¡¯m a 17 year old perfectly healthy citizen of the kingdom who had great plans about summer holidays. My greatest accomplishment was to lose my virginity. Though in case I couldn¡¯t achieve that dream, I wanted to at least have a kiss from a beauty. Guess what happened?


    [Me]: What? I was away the whole holidays doing night shifts.


    [Eliar]: Zara screwed up my summer holidays. I was staying at their house. Somehow she learnt that I know you the best out of all ¡°Guild of Elas¡± members.  She asked me few times about you, and about when you will get back. I told her that I do not know. But she insisted that I knew and was not going to tell her. Wherever I was going she was by me. My last possible chance to do the greatest thing what a boy of my age could attain had blown up.


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    [Me]: Who is Zara?


    [Eliar]: The girl who lost to you on semi-finals in the tournament.


    [Me]: Why would she ask for me?


    [Eliar]: I do not know and I care less. What I know is that getting to know you was the greatest failure of my teenage years and you had to pay for it somehow. Now get to your room, pack your stuff and in an hour be at admin¡¯s office. You will be assigned to a new room.


    My new room was on second floor, 203. I had no roommates again. Later on I went to Elise¡¯s house. Ricat was back from his usual all-around the Devil¡¯s Canyon tour. I wanted to get 20 golds as I didn¡¯t come to pick up the scholarship which he promised to give me during my studies. He did his best not to pay me the money reasoning out that I was not in school and holidays were not considered study time. We had a small argument which I won at the end. I asked Elise to show me around. We went to a nice restaurant. Had a dinner. After that we went to boulevard on the shore of Lake Kasp. Enjoyed the view sitting on bench close to waves and had ice creams.


    [Elise]: How is to be on duty protecting us from the evil elves?


    [Me]: Boring.


    [Elise]: You met any elves?


    [Me]: Yeah, the elven princess Alva.


    [Elise]: Really? Was she beautiful?


    [Me]: I think any future wife candidate has to be at least on par with Alva to be considered for marriage.


    [Elise]: W-w-w-what about me?


    [Me]: I think you are beauty and you have the potential. We have to wait another 3-4 years to conclude on the end results though.


    I was slapped hard. She looked at me in anger. I had to change the topic but nothing came to my mind.


    [Me]: I have a question which I would like to ask you first. Do you mind?


    [Elise]: It depends on the question!


    [Me]: What would you do if you were stuck with someone who didn¡¯t favor you and wanted to get rid of you?


    Few more slaps¡­ And she kissed me. We had a long kiss. Everyone was staring at us but I didn¡¯t care. Our lips departed.


    [Elise]: I would do this.


    She totally misunderstood me. I wanted no more misunderstandings so...


    [Me]: I will accompany you home.


    I took her back to her house and left back to dormitory. She had given me the answer which I or Alva couldn¡¯t come up with.


    I began to meditate. I went into trance. Everything went dark again. The cube appeared with wolf in it. I called to Ulfberht. I took him into my hands. I came close to the glass cube. On my first hit the glass cube shattered.


    [Me]: Sorry, Ulfberht.


    I did let go Ulfberht and sword fell down. Took a few steps forward. Wolf was looking at me. I dropped to my knees and my arms on shoulder level as if welcoming something. I shouted out ¡°Come at me!¡±


    Next: http://www.royalroadl.com/forum/showthread.php?tid=9853</a>

 Chapter 21 - Kingdom of Heaven

    Thank you all for taking interest in what I have been writing, and taking your time to read it. I would like to tell the readers who had commented things like "Thanks you for the chapter" - I am very grateful to you guys. I didn''t want to reply to your posts one by one as it would flood the thread but this way I would like to tell you that those Thank You''s mean a lot to me.


    Chapter 21 ¨C Kingdom of Heaven.


    It took slow steps and moved closing the distance between us. After each step it felt as an eternity has passed. I could see its eyes and teeth only. Each step it made was pouring out some kind of aura. Terror, horror, creepiness, panic, desperateness ¨C if all of these were combined together - wouldn¡¯t much come close to that aura. I began to waver.


    [Wolf]: Do you think I¡¯m Elise?


    Another step.


    [Wolf]: Do you expect me to kiss you?


    I could feel every inch of distance between us. I let go of everything. Thank god I¡¯ve sent a mail to my parents when I came back to Mehn Academy. I let go life itself. I didn¡¯t care anymore. I could feel its breath. A step, maybe two? I didn¡¯t regret anything that I had done until now. I looked directly into its eyes. It made another step. Its nose was clinging to my face. I stood firm by what I had decided moments ago. I will look into death¡¯s eyes. It made another step and its paw entered my body first. What I meant by the word entered is as it is. It was going into my body. Joining with me. The last part was its tail, which patted my nose before everything ended. I almost smashed my face; just by a second difference my arms went forward and supported me. I began to breathe desperately as if there was no air.


    Something like an earthquake happened. Darkness was vibrating. It began to diffuse. I could see light. I could see light flashing. I was still breathing heavily, standing on my knees and arms. I felt warms for the first time through my fingers. It was sand, warm sand. Behind me the sounds of waves were coming. I began to feel normal. It took a bit time, but I did feel strength in me again. Sounds of waves were giving me some kind of ecstasy. I stood up and saw a forest in front of me. I was on the shore. I turned back and saw a mass of water. I didn¡¯t know where I was. I walked straight into the forest. I walked and walked. I passed the forest and saw a big hill. There was a man and the wolf was beside him on the hill. I wiped my eyes with the backside of my left hand. I looked again and they had disappeared. I walked up the hill to the place where they were standing. They were not there. Though there was something that looked similar to throne or so it seemed. It was a big rock, and a place to sit was carved on it. A small cloud was above it and there was snow pouring down on the rock. I came close and sat on it as if it was mine to begin with. Lights got a bit brighter. I looked up and lights of sun, which was shining from behind, passed through the cloud. It stopped snowing and disappeared later. I turned my face and the mass of water was too beautiful. It was limitless. I felt so.


    Two presences appeared. The one on the right side felt similar. It was the one that was with me from the beginning. The same being who helped me out in the Mount Retnus. On the left I felt the wolf. It was in peace. Both of them at the same time whispered with a peaceful voice.


    Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!


    [-;-]: Welcome to the Kingdom of Heaven. The island is the sanctuary and the ocean is the power to protect it. Use it wisely.


    I woke up around 7 am. Changed my clothes and went for a run. My body was overflowing with unusual amount of power and strength. After breakfast, made my way to academy to select the classes, which I was going to attend this year. I had magic and art of war as compulsory classes. I selected mathematics and public administration as electives.


    Everyone was greeting me as they were passing by, and I was nodding at them. I had become a celebrity. I didn¡¯t like the attention that I was getting. I met Roia on my way to dorms, we chitchatted a bit and I left her to get to my room. Eliar was now a senior year student and was running the male sector of the dormitory. He had the qualities expected from a province level government worker, and I expect him to be of good use to the local province administration office where he intended to work after graduation. He had managed to get my portraits renewed in a day¡¯s time with new tattoo on the right place. How he did it? The answer is simple. That¡¯s what makes him eligible for government work. He can make things work out.


    I had few more days until school officially will be open. I had few plans regarding exploring the city. Elise told me that Ricat has invited me to their house on Saturday. I went to their house a bit after the noon. Roia¡¯s family was attending too. We had barbeque and I joined Ricat and Roia¡¯s father Kael in conversation regarding the state of kingdom and it¡¯s future. We all had our own views and most of the time they clashed and resulted in heated debates. It was almost late night when I left their house and came back to dormitory.


    The school was fun. I enjoyed my classes. I was active in discussions. I went to see Drama Club acting. They invited me as an actor for one of their acts and I was a tree. On 5th of Elaisis I celebrated my 15th birthday. I was told that I would not be eligible to enter the school tournament this year, as I was too strong for an academy student.


    On 3rd of Kali I met Zara for the first time after the battle that we had in the tournament. We had long talk with her. She told me that she already had a green light to work as a consultant at Ministry of Finance after the graduation. We went to a restaurant for lunch. Enjoyed fish and chips there. Had a long walk across the boulevard and discussed many things that I learned we shared in common. I didn¡¯t make a move on her but I could sense that she was expecting something. I accompanied her to the residence where they were leaving.


    I got to know that most of the students were avoiding me so I couldn¡¯t get meet any new people at all.


    I had few make out sessions with Mariette. She has not cut her hair, and it got long in the last year. That way she looked more attractive. She told me that my father and mother were doing fine. My sister still kept declining marriage offers.


    Attacks of the beast men had decreased while demons of the south had increased their attack patterns and frequency.


    Next: Chapter 22 - Two Horns</a>

 Chapter 22 - Two Horns

    Hey all. Sorry for the late release, as I''m managing my own business. On saturday and sundays we have more work than the rest of the week so most probably on saturday and sundays I''ll release a chapter a day.


    Chapter 22 ¨C Two horns.


    On 12th of Kali, late night, I was called in academy¡¯s registration office. There were more than 50 students present. Most of them were junior and senior year students. I was the only sophomore year student in the office. Zara was there as well. She didn¡¯t have any idea why we were here but she seemed happy to be in my company. In less than an hour we were taken to the main hall and headmaster was there with two Ministry of Defense officials.


    [Headmaster]:  Few hours ago I was notified by these two gentleman who represent Ministry of Defense that King Dar has decided on a proposal by His Excellency general Halim of Kali tribe to move forward to south lands and liberate them of demons by taking over the 2nd bridge. First phase is to take over the control of the 2nd bridge and 2nd phase is to secure it so that fortress could be build on the other side of the bridge.


    Students began to clap and applause. Everyone was in high spirits. Zara grabbed my right hand. I looked at her and our eyes met. I squeezed her hand. She was a smart girl. Zara knew that this announcement meant we were going to be sent to 2nd bridge. Headmaster moved his right arm a bit up and everything quieted down.


    [Headmaster]: Accordingly, general Halim would be leading the forces. Magi Vallis will be sending support forces to 2nd bridge as medical and magical back up. They will arrive there in a month time. Moreover general Halim has requested more than 50 students from our academy to support him to write a new page in history. You are the ones who have been selected to represent our academy and honor yourself and your families in this crusade against the pawns of evil. In an hour, all of you should be ready in tournament arena to depart to 2nd bridge. Balloon ships are already there waiting for you.


    Total silence fell to the hall. I could see the students standing in front of me trembling out of fear.


    [Headmaster]: Anyone who is not present at arena in an hour will be executed and their families will be joining them shortly afterwards. I wish you all good luck!


    I was in the arena, half and hour after the announcement by the headmaster.


    Balloons left the academy around 11 o¡¯clock at night. It would take about two weeks to reach the 2nd bridge. Most of the travel time I slept and when I was awake I was chatting with Zara and few others.


    I was asleep and was woken up by Zara. Everyone was asleep, and 12 hours or so were left till we reached the second bridge. I could see the fear and worry in her eyes. I hugged her and whispered to her left ear.


    [Me]: I will protect you. Now sleep.


    She closed her eyes and slept well. Zara in my arms, I couldn¡¯t sleep.


    There were another 10 days until Magi Vallis reached 2nd bridge. We were left to train on our own and prepare mentally for the coming battle. I met Nuve and Igdes at the camp just beside the 2nd bridge. We talked about new things, which had happened to all of us in the last year and half.


    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    We were given wine at nights. I could tell that these come from Hunter Valley and had great taste. Our group, informally Bands of Brats, was drinking wine by fire at the last night before Magi Vallis arrival. I stood up and went close to fire. Drums were beating. I began to dance. Our tribal dances were more like war dances and took form after different animals. I raised both of my arms to air and began to raise my legs to knee level by making slow steps to front, left and right. I was imitating and eagle. A mountain eagle that was about to fly. I began to increase my pace to sync with beats of drums. Fellow students began to whistle and clap. Most of them saw a Kali tribe dance for the first time and I hoped it wouldn¡¯t be their last. We enjoyed that night to the best we could.


    Next morning the balloons bringing Magi Vallis came. They had supplies of herbs, potions and medicine with them. Rahul went to general Halim¡¯s headquarter and came back later on. I was talking to Elana when he arrived. I was happy to see him again.


    There were more than 5000 thousand warriors and magicians in the camp. Same night we marched forward. We were on the left front. I was selected as the leader of the band as I had more experience than most of them and Rahul, Nuve and Igdes had recommended me as the potential leader for Band of Brats.


    We marched for two days and we didn¡¯t meet any kind of resistance. During those two days, once in a while 10-15 demons were seen and eliminated. Another 5 days passed and southern lands could be seen with bare eyes. Fellow students were in high morale but I couldn¡¯t believe that demons would let us pass as easy as this.


    All the forces combined together into one. General Halim was still in command. He was planning to put all the forces close together and focus one by one on different parts of the bridge to build the fortress walls first. Warriors were on front wings of the army. After them mages and archers were placed. Cavalry was stationed behind on behind them. On 10-hour schedule behind the army there was fleet of balloons, which were carrying stones, metals and any other material needed for the completion of the wall.


    After balloons reached and first part of the wall finished, they went back for more supplies of materials. On maximum speed it would take another two days for them to come back. Though now we had, even though very small, wall that gave us a feeling of protection.


    Southlands seemed like they were composed of deserts only. Nobody had gone here and mapped it. The last group that went into demon lands was Kali and his companions. Thus we were making history. Now the question in my mind was, what was history going to make of us. It did not take long.


    Next day afternoon, a knight appeared on the sand hill a kilometer or a bit more away from us. I took out binoculars and checked the demon. It was on a dark horse. Fire was coming out of horse''s iron tips and covering the its legs up to its tip. The knight had a big sword on him. It was wearing full armor and red mana was flowing out of its eyelets and mouth. Though one of them half broken, it had two horns.


    Next: Chapter 23 - Dust.</a>

 Chapter 23 - Dust.

    Chapter 23 ¨C Dust.


    The demon knight took out his sword and raised his arm into air. Slowly massive demon army emerged behind the knight. Knight began to ride its horse towards us. Knight was riding approximately hundred meters in front of the army.


    They had more than 10000 demons with them, and that was a big advantage.


    General Halim was in shock. He was son a warrior but he didn¡¯t have what it takes to be warrior. I had never met him before, but I could sense it. I took a horse and went to him. Nuve, Igdes and Aram was with him. All of them on horse. Aram was the commander of the troops that were protecting 2nd bridge. I nodded to all of them by bowing my head a bit. I knew they were great people but they haven¡¯t leaded an army into a war. Situation was tense and even if we could survive ¨C we would have an army of 5000 defeated.


    The knight sheathed its sword. It turn back and again towards us. 5 demons left the army and came to stay behind the knight. Knight began to ride and stopped about hundred meters in distance to our army.


    [Me]: General, excuse me for my insolence, I assume they are expecting us to meet them face to face.


    [Halim]: Do you expect me to go there? ¡°Brave¡± one! (He pronounced brave in a not so favorable tone, which I didn¡¯t care much about as we were facing dare situation)


    [Me]: You are the general leading this army!


    [Igdes]: You should leave this matter to elders and leave now! (Igdes was a bit of politician but Nuve was a hot-blooded warrior and had an evilish grin on his face)


    [Halim]: He shouldn¡¯t leave. He will be with us facing the demons. Igdes, Nuve, Aram, Elana and you(he pointed towards me) will be coming with me. Rahul you are the commander of army in my absence.


    Halim rode his horse and we rode behind him to the destination.


    We came close enough to them to see what the other five demons were looking like.


    First one was a two meter tall demon who had only his underwear covered by big metal spikes. He was nude and its body color was red. It had four horns. Two of them were big and the other small ones were located in between those two. He had a good build. It had its mouth open the whole time and its teeth looked like a jigsaw. It had two swords on it. Each sword was in one of his hands.


    The second demon had just a simple sword at his hand. His body did seem like it had rotted but no smell was around. Left part of his head over his eye was missing.


    The third one was the most interesting to me. She had caught my attention. Her face was very beautiful. A goddess. She had big busts. Her skin was as white as it could get. She had black leather covering her most important parts but still was a beauty to be enjoyed. She had a tail and the end of tail was like a scythe. She had two black wings.


    The fourth had four spiderlike claws instead of legs. He was massive. Maybe 6-7 meters in height. Its body was according to its size. It had a huge fat body. He was emitting a disgusting smell. I didn¡¯t even look at his face but he had a scythe at one of his hands.


    The fifth one was a sight to see. His face was emotionless and featureless as it could get. He had long dreadlocks. He was a giant too. Around 4 meters in height. His armor was carved in an original way. It was like a work of an excellent artist. Knee parts of armor were carved into skulls. On abdomen there was another face carved which felt like it¡¯s going to talk any minute now. It had a massive sword, maybe same size or bigger than Ulfberht. Rain-guard of the sword had a metal skull carved on it. Cross-guards were like two horns that bended towards the central ridge of the sword. He had a great armor and I was really impressed.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    [Knight]: Why are you here?


    [Halim]: W-w-we are to claim south lands in the name of King Dar!


    [Knight]: We, the noble demons, haven¡¯t invaded the north because of the pact which was signed a millennia and half ago. Pact was signed between the human Kali and Demon Lord Akasha. The only time when humans are allowed into south lands is when the dragon awakens. There are 6 years left until that time. You are too early.


    [Halim]: I know not of any pact!


    [Knight]: Good, then you and me shall have a duel. If you win you are to do whatever you want and no demon would go against your actions.


    General Halim hesitated for a moment.


    [Halim]: Demons have attacked and tried to come in our lands many times. What you have to say about that?


    (He evaded knight¡¯s duel request masterfully. )


    [Knight]: Those were the ones who feared to face the coming dragon and run away. They are not to be referred or called a demon. As they have no pride in them.


    [Halim]: We will build the fort here, on this side of bridge to make sure that nobody passes to that side.


    [Knight]: What you will do is to go back to where you came from and never come back here again.


    [Halim]: You are not the one to tell us what to do!


    [Knight]: Let me tell you something else, there is going to be massacre and I think you know who is going to be the butcher.


    [Halim]: You have a loud mouth.


    [Knight]: I do not and if you feel otherwise I¡¯m more than glad to see how you prove it out.


    It was second time the knight was challenging general Halim.


    [Halim]: I will let know the king about the pact. I¡¯m a man of peace. My main intention coming here was to stop the attack of the demons. Seems we will be doing what we have been doing for the last millennia and half. Solve your problems out by killing the ones who reach our side of the bridge.


    [Knight]: Karan, up to my knowledge there was no wall over our side of the bridge.


    [Karan]: Yes my lord. There was none and there will be no walls.


    The fourth demon with spider claws came forward and raised its scythe up. Chanted something and a light ball emerged, fire began to surround it and Karan pushed his scythe towards the wall. Lightball flew to wall and smashed on it. Sound of the explosion was terrifying. The wall turned into dust.


    P.S: I you feel like writing a review about the:  Wolf''s Cry </a>


    Next: Chapter 24 - I will protect you!</a>

 Chapter 24 - I will protect you!

    Chapter 24 ¨C I will protect you!


    There was awkward silence on air. Halim was a power hungry human being who was cornered by a demon knight. The fate has given Halim a test, which he couldn¡¯t pass. Everyone was in shock. Halim was speechless.


    [Me]: Is it how a noble acts?


    [Knight]: Whatever I do is justifiable as you were the ones who breached the pact.


    Halim turned towards us and¡­


    [Halim]: Which one of you will clean the dirt thrown at our pride and dignity?


    [Me]: I will.


    I got off the horse.


    [Me]: I, Aslan of Kali tribe, request a duel with Karan of the southlands.


    Karan¡¯s eyes turn to demon knight as if asking for permission and the knight nodded in agreement.


    [Karan]: I accept.


    [Halim]: Aslan, sometimes it is not about winning or losing. It is about standing against the oppressor and taking the side of righteousness and justice. You have chosen the path of heroes. Your name is going to be carved on royal road of legends.


    If there would be somebody other than my father on my hate list it would be Halim. He was talking as if I was already dead.


    He was making sacrifice of me for god knows what plan was going through his perplexed mind.


    Everyone backed away. I was facing Karan. I knew that he has magical abilities that surpassed me many times over. I had to drag him into a physical fighting, but him having a scythe meant he is a good fighter too.


    [Karan]: Kid, this is what you wished for.


    I didn¡¯t feel like answering to him. I telepathically called out to Ulfberht and asked him to turn into sword. Ring on my right pinky finger flashed and I had massive Ulfberht in my hands. I engulfed my body in mana and run to Karan¡¯s right as my life depended on how quick I finish him off. Karan was caught off guard but he was no rookie. I charged Ulfberht at him as powerfull as I could as soon as I reached his claw but he moved too fast for a body such as his. He had his scythe trying to slash me but I jumped back. I attacked his scythe and he took it up into air when Ulfberht turned into a ring and I used the momentum to somersault. I rolled under him and Ulfberht turned into a sword again, I slashed at his claws and the joint, which had four claws, kept together. I jumped out and turned back at him keeping my fighting stance. He began to throw lightballs and fireballs at me. He was angry. I did my best to avoid explosions occurring all around the place. I was almost blasted away once but didn¡¯t lose my composure. He was getting angrier, screaming around. I used the chance and teleported onto his front right claw and had Ulfberht up on his neck.


    This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it.


    [Me]: We could kill each other here or we could fight the dragon side by side when the time comes!


    I was lucky that Karan was a magician type of demon or else I couldn¡¯t win him. I jumped back and turned to demon knight.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Aslan of Kali¡¯s tribe. We came because we were attacked. We will leave because we know that you mean no harm to us. We will need a copy of pact to know what we are entitled too.


    The 2nd monster spoke.


    [-]: insan. Insaan. Insaaan.


    [Knight]: In old language of humans that word means human being. Though it has a second meaning to it, which is the one who forgets.


    [-]: I would love to fight Aslan to death in bedroom.


    [Knight]: Succubus Anika control yourself!


    [Anika]: That weapon is of the demon origin. A human controlling that is a rare sight to see.


    [Knight]: You should leave now! We will talk about future relations at another time.


    [Halim]: We will!


    Halim lead us back to army. Balloons that brought materials for the construction of wall were sent back. We left the south lands back to kingdom. I was in Halim¡¯s entourage until evening, when we stopped for night. I left them and went to my Band of Brats. Everybody knew whom I had fought and they were nodding at me to show respect. We sat around the fire and had wine.


    It took us almost a week to reach the fortress of 2nd bridge. Halim had changed his plans, and it seems I was not taken as a disruption to them. He told me that, as Minister of Defence he would recommend me to king for my heroic activities during the ¡°Southlands Exploration¡±. He already had a new name and plans to cover up his failure with the initial plan to invade and expand.


    The night that we spent at 2nd bridge¡¯s fort for the first time after we left the demon lands I had chance to talk to Zara. I could feel she was nervous.


    [Me]: I told you I will protect you!


    Next: Chapter 25 - Meet the Demon Lord</a>

 Chapter 25 - Meet the Demon Lord

    There were only 6 humans including me who had witnessed demon knight¡¯s arguments regarding the pact and coming age of the dragon. It was a prophetic situation where we were the messengers. Halim took over the control of the situation by ordering us not to talk to anybody what happened there. Everybody had seen and spectated my fight with Karan but nobody was close enough to hear the arguments coming and going between general Halim and demon knight. Halim was going to take advantage of this situation and use it to its maximum potential to his convenience. He had the right connections and he was the Minister of Defense of the Kingdom of Kali.


    Kingdom going into war with demons was not a rational choice. I knew that because the demons who we had problems protecting our borders were less powerful than foot soldiers in the real demon army. No demon of Karan¡¯s level had ever attacked forts on any of the three bridges. Going against them would be like signing the bill that would end the kingdom in one go.


    Another fact which made me think that way was that the demon knight ordered Karan to destroy the wall but didn¡¯t attacked us even though he could. Taking our intrusion to their land as a cause to invade our territories would be a good reason though you do not need reasons to invade, they didn¡¯t. Which meant there was a pact and demons were not who we imagined them to be. Halim had the copy of the pact but he was not planning to share it with anybody else. I kept my silence while staying in a distance from what was happening.


    Aram had honored me by ordering a tattoo to be drawn on my left shoulder which declared that I¡¯m to be given command of the any bridge¡¯s defense in case the commander was absent. He told me that the bravery which I showed was exceptional due to my age and it reminded him of his youth when old people were talking about the tales of the brave ones.


    First week of the Mut we arrived in Mehn. I left the party and went to academy. I was tired of travelling and wanted to have a good sleep. I was just laying down on bed that Eliar crashed my peace.


    [Eliar]: What¡¯s up hero?


    [Me]: You should knock first.


    [Eliar]: Listen, when you get big in the future, I want you to appoint me as the amir of the province which I come from.


    [Me]: If that¡¯s all, then get out of my room. I want to sleep.


    [Eliar]: Hero¡¯s do not get tired or sleep. Now change your clothes, we are going to hall. All of the students are arriving there as we talk.


    [Me]: What¡¯s happening?


    [Eliar]: Get up! Haven¡¯t seen a hero who is as lazy as you are!


    I changed back to school uniform and we went to academy hall. It was packed. I think they never imagined to have these much of students in one place though hall was a massive place to held ceremonies.


    50 of us, who were sent to general Halim¡¯s ¡°Southlands Exploration¡± were teamed so that everyone could see us clearly. Headmaster stepped up and silence fell.


    This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there.


    [Headmaster]: I¡¯m honored to inform you all that band formed of Mehn Academy students have returned safe and sound. These brave students that represented our academy have faced dangers of none known to us and gracefully have come out of it. As the Headmaster of academy, I¡¯m releasing them of whatever left of this year¡¯s studies. Senior year students who participated will be given early certificate of the completion of studies. Junior year students would be sent to their homes for early vacations.


    For a moment his eyes turned to me and he smiled.


    [Headmaster]: Moreover, sophomore year student Aslan has shown extraordinary performance during the expedition. He has fought a general level demon on same grounds and spared its life. Minister of Defense His Excellency General Halim son of King Dar of the tribe of Kali has requested Aslan¡¯s presence in Ministry. He will be released of all academy duties including schooling and dormitory and will be sent to ministry as an intern. He will be given his certificate of completion of studies after two years by the order of Minister.


    Applauses, hoorays, claps, whistling covered the entire hall. Headmaster turned at me and by moving fingers of his right hand signed to come over. I came to stall a bit away from his right side. Headmaster moved his left hand up and silence fell again.


    [Headmaster]: Students like them (showing us by his right hand) and you (talking to audition) are our pride and glory.


    We had a handshake and I left back to initial place where I was standing. I saw Mariette looking at me and I nodded at her. She began to smile.


    I meet Mariette, Roia and Elise after headmaster¡¯s never ending speech finished. We went to a caf¨¦ and had tea and coffee with cookie. They had so many question and I was too tired. I smiled at me and explain my situation and left to my room. Had a good sleep. In the morning I went to Ministry of Defense.


    Though warriors and mages didn¡¯t have any kind of uniforms, the bureaucrats of each ministry had their own uniforms. Even the foot soldiers who were protecting the entrance of the ministry had a different feeling about them. They were standing like stone statues. I didn¡¯t mind them a lot, went inside and was told at reception that Minister of Defense His Excellence General Halim will be meeting me shortly. I entered his office. The room was bigger than our house back in the village. The guy had a big ego.


    I went inside and saw Halim looking out of the massive windows. He had a uniform on him, not of a warrior but of a bureaucrat. His clothing was first grade though. He turned back to me¡­


    [Halim]: You have proven yourself.


    I nodded.


    [Halim]: You will be working under my direct command. Soon I will be sending you and few others in King Dar¡¯s name to meet the Demon Lord¡­


    Next: Chapter 26 - In Castle</a>

 Chapter 26 - In Castle

    Chapter 26 ¨C In Castle.


    I wasn¡¯t going against Halim¡¯s plans as I didn¡¯t know what were aims and goals of his. But as an official of Ministry of Defense even as an intern I was able to get more information about what was happening around the kingdom. I was attending roundtables held by different ministries. The most important of these meetings was with the officials of the Ministry of Finance. In short, the economy of the kingdom has improved so much that the well-established paradigms of millennia were changing and evolving in few years in different extremes. The root cause of the problem was the king himself who had established the kingdom. He was not young anymore, actually he was not attending anything at all. I would even question his sanity. Halim felt as if he should continue King Dar¡¯s legacy and he was involved in matters of daily life to foreign affairs and education. King was like a puppet who signed what was brought to him. The greatest thing about Halim was that he knew if he didn¡¯t act now, there will be no chance later after King Dar dies. He was doing everything what he was capable of building the kingdom by making sure that the people of different tribes were transforming to be the citizens of the kingdom. I would totally back him up if he could do that but there was a problem. That problem was our tribe, Kali¡¯s tribe. Most of the warriors and mages who protected this kingdom either in south or north were from our tribe and King held the title of Elder of the Kali tribe. Now, without our tribe, nobody would listen to the king. But with our tribe involved in the process, kingdom was not a real kingdom. As a monarchy (at least Tat¡¯s of the east did so), the position of king was passed to the crown prince. In our case it was Halim. Though if he was crowned as the king and the next elder of the Kali tribe went against him, he would be the king without the crown. Now back to the economics; Halim was making sure that less warriors and mages stayed back in the original village established by Kali and moved to different areas of the kingdom. They would be given positions of power in different parts of the kingdom according to their reputation back in the village. The rest or most of who was left were on posts guarding the kingdom. They didn¡¯t work anymore. In sense, they were so involved in matters of guarding and power held in different positions they were accustomed to free money that Halim was paying to them. Tribesmen thought they were doing what they like but actually Halim was intentionally degrading them by paying them more and more each and every year.


    In a decade or two, I thought there would be no more tribes around. There would be citizens of the kingdom. If he was going with this plan, I wouldn¡¯t support him but I didn¡¯t have enough power to stand up to him. So I thought I would follow the path which destiny has engraved for me for now. I could take over the position of the elder if I felt so in the future; demon knight¡¯s mentioning of the dragon had more importance to me than these tribal matters.


    There was an exchange of the mail with the demon lord. Halim told that in a matter of few months there will be an envoy sent to demon lands and I will participate in it. I was being a good boy for now, and waiting for my chance to come.


    I never let go of the training. I would run daily. Push-ups and pull-ups were part of the training program. 5th of Elaisis came again, and I turned 16. I grew in height to 5¡¯ 8¡¯¡¯. I would go once in a while to academy to meet Mariette, Roia and Elise. I did meet Zara whenever I was going to Ministry of Finance. There were some very beautiful girls at Ministry of Defense, but I did my best to stay away from them and keep everything at workmate level.


    I was regularly writing to my mother. My father had gone a level up in drinking and was troubling my mother but I assume she was happy with him. Lei was engaged to a guy from a normal family like ours. She had written once to me about her choice. She wrote that she wanted to marry the guy because she loved him. I wrote back that I would do my best to attend their wedding, in case I would be in demon lands I would give her an expensive gift. In my mails, I told them that I may be months away from them but if they thought they need my help I would go to them even if I had to massacre the whole continent.


    Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.


    13th of Arkam we left to 3rd bridge. The people who will be representing the Kingdom of Kali consisted of me, Ule (commander of 3rd bridge), Araxis from the ministry of foreign affairs, Elana of Magi Vallis, Dralan of the Ministry of Defense and Anthon from King¡¯s apparatus.


    Our group met Ule at the 3rd bridge. We passed 3rd bridge in 8 days. Anika the succubus was waiting for us on the other side of bridge. We met her and began our journey towards the castle where the Demon Lord was residing.


    We walked more than two weeks in the desert. Desert ended and we went through barren lands. The cities were different in design to the usual ones that we had in our kingdom.


    Demons had their way of life which was similar in a way to what we had. They were still living in a tribal manner. There were large and small demonic tribes. On our way, I met Karan who was the leader of his tribe which had 40 members only. We chatted with him for a bit and left to castle.


    Anika told us that there is not that much left to castle. We arrived in castle in 2 days after leaving Karan¡¯s tribe. I still do not know why we didn¡¯t take balloon ship with us for ease of travel.


    The weather got so hot at some point that we took most of our clothes up from the waist. Anika wasn¡¯t sweating a bit. We came to a place which was boiling with lavas. The land was in cracks in many places all around and lava was streaming through the cracks. The castle of the Demon Lord was surrounded by those lava streams. We entered the castle. It was still hot. I wondered what kind of being the Demon Lord is to live in a place like this. Anika began to sweat too.


    We went through many rooms and arrived in a large hall. It had many doors side by side inside it. There was a large double-door on the opposite side. The castle overall had a magnificent design. It was made only out of rocks but they were carved in an interesting way with almost live pictures of hybrid animals, demons and other creatures.


    Anika showed us the massive double-doors and told us to wait and enter to Demon Lord¡¯s presence after the doors opened. She left us. Both doors had dark angels carved on them so realistically that you could mistake them for real ones. The doors opened and we entered. The room was carved in red carpet. The room was massive. 15 meters or more in height. There was a throne and the demon knight which we had met near the 2nd bridge.


    [Knight]: Welcome to demon lands. I¡¯m Kimbra the Demon Lord who rules the southlands.


    Each of us introduced ourselves in respective manner.


    [Kimbra]: You have travelled a lot and you must be hungry and tired. Eat well and sleep. I¡¯ll meet you all tomorrow.


    Anika appeared behind us and we went to eat. Later on she showed us to our rooms. I was given a big room. I think there was not a small room in the castle.


    Next: Chapter 27 - Ignis Tribe</a>

 Chapter 27 – Ignis Tribe

    Chapter 27 ¨C Ignis Tribe


    I went to bed. Weariness of trip and change in environment had kind of paralyzed me. My eyes closed as soon as I laid on bed.


    Knock. Knock. Knock¡­ I didn¡¯t want to open my eyes. Another few knocks on the door. I felt an ominous aura surrounding me. I jumped up and saw a maid in front of the bed. I was in shock.


    She was tiny. Had a black and white maid clothes on her. Her skin color was unnaturally white.


    [Maid]: Demon Lord wishes to see you.


    [Me]: Ok. I¡¯ll be ready in a minute.


    She didn¡¯t leave the room and waited for me to get dressed up. I followed her out of my room to another one. It was a large bedroom. Door was on the left side of the room. On opposite side there were two big armchairs. On the right side from the entrance there was a king size bed which was covered by red curtains. The demon lord was sitting on one of the armchairs, his black armor illuminated by the lights of the moon.


    [Kimbra]: Fran?oise, you may leave.


    The maid left the room.


    [Kimbra]: Aslan, I¡¯m very sorry to disturb your sleep.


    [Me]: Lord has to have his reasons for it, I assume.


    [Kimbra]: I wanted to have private chat with you and didn¡¯t want any of your companions to listen to our conversation.


    [Me]: Lord Kimbra, if you expect me to do what I think you want from me¡­ (Demon Lord stopped me by raising left hand.)


    [Kimbra]: Why don¡¯t you come and sit?!


    I went and sat in the armchair across to the one she was sitting on.


    [Kimbra]: Aslan, sword that you were using while fighting Karan is of demonic origin. Long time ago I was told of weapon that a demon named Rai used, which in description is similar to yours.


    [Me]: I do not remember exactly who gave it to me, but it has been with me few years.


    [Kimbra]: What about the thing inside you? I feel another presence of a demonic realm inside you.


    [Me]: Do you know about the wolf?


    [Kimbra]: It¡¯s weak but it is there. It¡¯s weak because it has been merged with you but you are not aware of its power yet.


    I overreacted to her words and spoke my thoughts without cutting out some parts.


    [Me]: Ulfberht told me that it was a gift from Lord Tyre but I took it as a curse because I had problem until recently with it.


    [Kimbra]: You have been to the Temple of Tyre and accepted the gift He had left. Hahaa. I thought that was a tale but seeing you now changes my mind. You are interesting; an interesting persona Aslan. The more I get to know you the more I like you.


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    I was astonished at Kimbra¡¯s words and was puzzled at them.


    [Kimbra]: Long time ago there was a Demon Lord who had outer appearance which was similar to beast man and human but was of demonic origin. Their tribe had lived in demon lands for thousands of years. Normally they were in their human forms but in case of anger and/or fight they could transform into a beast man. The difference between them and beast men were that they could use magic but beast men cannot.


    [Me]: What happened to them?


    [Kimbra]: The last one left alive of the tribe after killing the dragon was Demon Lord Tyre. He was injured badly in the fight with the Akira, the red dragon. The story is that a temple was built accordingly and he left to otherworld but his power was contained in the temple as a gift to anyone who could contain it within their body. His three generals committed suicide to follow their commander to the otherworld but their souls were bound to the temple until the day gift was given to the one. Rai was one of those legendary generals.


    I was lost in thought; trying to perceive what I was told.


    [Kimbra]: I may help you to revive the power!


    [Me]: In exchange for what? (You know nothing is free in this world!)


    [Kimbra]: After the awakening you will have to spend a night with me!


    [Me]: But you are a male!!?!


    The armor began to disperse into air. The small parts that broke away from black armor turned to white snowflakes and disappeared. A nude woman appeared underneath the armor. She had her left leg on top of her right one. There were black metallic ornaments with red stones on them a bit up her feet and around her hands. There were flames coming out of them. Her hair color was flamish red and her big busts were covered in flames too.


    In a very beautiful and mesmerizing voice¡­


    [Kimbra]: You do not expect a Demon Lord run around in a state like this.


    [Me]: I-i do notttt.


    [Kimbra]: I am Demon Lord Kimbra, the last of the Ignis tribe.


    Next: Chapter 28 - I Lost My...</a>

 Chapter 28 – I Lost My...

    I do not proofread the chapters. I write and publish them. That''s why most of the time it may seem like a 13 year old writing but you have to understand that I haven''t used English in the last 3-4 years. Last time, I talked to somebody else in English was  in India in late 2013. Nevertheless, I will do my best to make proper structured sentences in future.


    WARNING +16


    ************************************************


    Chapter 28 ¨C I Lost My...


    [Kimbra]: You should rest tonight and tomorrow night we will talk about details and initiate the process of awakening. Fran?oise!


    Maid entered the room.


    [Kimbra]: Show our guest back to his room.


    I stood up and went after Fran?oise the maid. In the morning after breakfast we were led to the conference room. It had an oval table in center of it. Stools were installed just beside the table. Because of table¡¯s design everyone could see each other and respectively debate the questions put forward. Kimbra was wearing her armor, nobody was aware that the demon lord speaking to them was female. Araxis had few questions regarding the pact that he addressed to Demon Lord and Kimbra¡¯s answers satisfied him (probably the questions were set by Halim) so he stood by for the most of the discussions. Kimbra enlightened us in matters of how and when the dragon will come forward to destroy the world. According to her wyrm is already somewhere around in southlands and feeding on lower forms of animals and demons. The prophecy is that an egg of dragon will appear on southlands and a wyrm will be born. It¡¯s to destroy everything and anything until it is killed. Demonic folklore tells that dragon has to be killed to bring peace to world again; the reason for dragon to appear though is that the races and species that live in world go stray and walk off the path set for them. The signs of wyrm¡¯s birth were discussed and Kimbra showed us some undeniable symbols and signals that proved her theory that there were maximum of 5 years left until dragon showed itself and began what it was supposed to do. Demon Lord told us that the demon army would be more than enough to oppose the dragon when it turns up but if humans could send their warriors and mages to reinforce the army it would be an easy win, or at least there was a chance to minimize the casualties. Ule, Elana and I were the outsiders of the discussions held. Anthon from the King¡¯s apparatus and Dralan of the Ministry of Defense were more into discussions than any of us, they were writing, calculating and planning.


    After sunset we had our dinner and were sent to our bedrooms. Late night, Fran?oise showed me to Kimbra¡¯s bedroom.


    [Kimbra]: welcome, Aslan.


    [Me]: Good evening.


    [Kimbra]: The gift given to you is of demonic origin so it should not favor anyone entering its realm and hanging out in it. Can you tell me more about the wolf?


    The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.


    I told her about the first man whose presence I sensed first. How he helped me out in cave in Mount Resnut and what happened in Temple of Tyre. About the darkness, glass cube and wolf. I informed her about breaking the cube and releasing the wolf, entering the island, going to hill and sitting on the rocky throne.


    [Kimbra]: Alright, you should begin to meditate now, as soon as you enter that trance state, I will join you.


    I sat in lotus position and began to meditate. Soon I was standing on the beach. Sun shining and forest in front of me. I felt a powerful presence and somebody hugged me from behind. I heard whispers on my right ear.


    [Kimbra]: This is beautiful. Let¡¯s go to the hill what you were talking about.


    I took her hand we went into the forest and passed it after a 20 minute walk (at least it felt so). We climbed to top of the hill. I went and sat on throne. Kimbra stopped.


    [Kimbra]: One of them is you Aslan. It is your mana that has taken form. The wolf though is the demonic power within you.


    [Me]: So how do I get to use their power?


    [Kimbra]: You told me that after Mount Retnus you could use mana within you freely as the mana inside you had taken form and given you the permission to use its power. The wolf has to do the same.


    [Me]: How?


    [Kimbra]: It¡¯s easy. Call out to him and ask it! I¡¯ll be waiting for you on the other side. Do not let anger to take over though. Before I go, I will contribute to the process a bit.


    She came forward and kissed me. I closed my eyes. Her kiss brought up the feelings of pleasure, anger, love and hate in me. I opened my eyes. She had disappeared.


    [Wolf]: What do you want again?


    [Me]: I want to be as strong as Lord Tyre was. I want what was left to me by him.


    [Wolf]: You will get what you want! Do not forget this is what you desired for.


    I began to see different sceneries as if I was in someone else¡¯s body. Killing people, beheading them, fighting for power, and throne of demon lord. It was all Tyre¡¯s memories becoming part of me. His knowledge and power were part of me now.


    I opened my eyes. Kimbra was in front of me and I was lying on her bed. She came over and sat on my lap. We began to kiss. The flames coming out of her didn¡¯t hurt me. Our kisses become more probing and I became less shy. I began trailing kisses down her neck and across her shoulders. Her body was reacting to every kiss. Her body began to tremble as my tongue swirled around her nipples.  She rested her hands on the back of my head and pulled towards herself to encourage me to keep going. There was an electric current going through my body. We made love until first blush of the sunlight. That¡¯s how I lost my¡­


    Next: Chapter 29 - Beautiful Ladies?</a>

 Chapter 29 - Beautiful Ladies?

    Chapter 29 ¨C Beautiful Ladies?


    We didn¡¯t sleep that night. At sunset I got off the bed to wear my clothes and leave before anyone else from our delegation notices my absence from the bedroom. Kimbra told me to look into the mirror and see the difference. Muscles in my body were more prominent and my hair had grown up to my shoulders. Kimbra was lying on the bed, her head resting on her left arm.


    [Kimbra]: This is the power of the wolfie. In case, your anger takes over you will transform a lot more. Now, you should be able to transform back to your human self instinctively.


    I stared at mirror briefly and felt the strength of wolf as if so to speak flowing in my veins. Awareness of my surrounding was extraordinary. I could sense Fran?oise standing on the other side of door still as she was a statue. Simultaneously, I had to get used to this new feeling. The thought of transforming popped in my mind and my body accordingly molded back to my normal self. Hair got shorter and the excessive muscle which I didn¡¯t have was out of sight. It was like a cocoon mutating into a butterfly and vice-versa.


    [Kimbra]: The race that Demon Lord Tyre belonged was called Werewolves. You are a werewolf!


    That day we met Demon Lord Kimbra for the last time and our delegacy left the castle. My new powers helped me to adapt to southlands easily. I was not tired or consumed a fraction of my strength by the time we reached the 2nd bridge. The trip from demon lord¡¯s castle to the 2nd bridge was a good test to know my physical limits in comparison to my old self. Hearing go so well that I could sense my companions¡¯ heartbeat, my vision got much better and I had inhuman physical strength. Elana left to Magi Vallis headquarters and Ule to 3rd bridge. Dralan, Anthon and yours truly departed to Mehn.


    Mehn was in a day¡¯s distance, when the balloon ship we were using landed in a small city for the last time so that fuel could be resupplied. Most of the time through the trip Ulfberht was in ring form so I wasn¡¯t standing out in a crowd when we left to city. We decided we should stay overnight in an inn and next day at sunrise to depart to Mehn. The inn what we were staying at was called ¡°Albert¡¯s¡± and it had 2 floors. It was a simple, elegant yet well-known place in the city of Ark. First thing that caught my eyes entering the inn were many tables and stools side by side which proved that it was a well-known place. We arrived at inn before the sunset though there were a lot of people already dining and drinking. Bar and counter were located after the tables. I think kitchen was behind the bar because there was a door which was half open and waitresses moved in and out regularly as we were talking to Albert at counter. There were two stairs on opposite ends of the 1st floor that could be used to go up to 2nd floor where rooms were located. We rented rooms and attended dinner after we had showers and cleaned ourselves. There was some kind of local festive happening and people were marching to the city center to attend something which I was not informed about. During the meal as my companions were chatting with each other I heard few men whispering to each other about us. I turned my face in the direction of those men to see who they were. They were standing close to inn¡¯s entrance. There were 4 men talking and one of them had nothing on him but the others had swords and knifes on them, and were of good built. They didn¡¯t seem to be residents of our kingdom, more likely they were mercenaries from the land of Tat¡¯s. The fourth man was explaining them where we have sitting and one by one the others were turning to take a peek at us to remember our faces. Drolan was from our tribe, but he was a lost case as a warrior but smart man. Man of books. His father was amir of some northern district and his close relatives held good position in capital and he was kind of was forced into the position what he held in Ministry of Defense. Halim knew of his background but had acknowledged Drolan¡¯s intellect and theoretical knowledge which was useful in a way. Anthon was a childhood friend of Halim. He was a good politician and an excellent bureaucrat. Nevertheless, if you saw the fat in their bellies you would know that they haven¡¯t touched a sword or trained at all for a good half of eternity. I stood up and went to door and looked outside. People were walking to city center and having fun on the way. Everybody had smiles on them. I turned back¡­


    Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    [Me]: Drolan! Anthon! Hey why don¡¯t we go to city center and to see what¡¯s happening there?


    I walked back to our table. Though my ears were focused on 4 men.


    [-]: Good, this is too good.


    [-]: yes, we could stab them with knife and nobody will know who did it.


    [-]: much better than initial plan.


    They told me they couldn¡¯t hear what I was telling to them. I asked them to go out with me to join the festive for few hours, have few drinks and maybe to meet few beautiful women. As they heard last part of my suggestion they nodded, we paid for meals and left the inn.


    Drolan told us few dirty jokes and we had a laugh. I saw a road few meters away from us which was perpendicularly crossing the street we were walking on. I put my arms on Drolan and Anthon¡¯s shoulders and pressed them towards myself.


    [Me]: There are 3 armed people who have been spying on us from the moment we have left the inn.


    We were closing on the road when I put a bit of force and turned all of us into the small road. It was around 5 meters wide and fortunately nobody was around. I could sense Drolan and Anthon¡¯s heartbeats getting faster.


    [Me]: Now, run for a bit and stop and turn towards me. Do not get too far away for them to run after you. Just keep your distance so that all of them come after me first and I can take them out.


    They nodded, run for a bit and stopped.


    I walked for 10 meters and turned back towards the crowd which was happily passing the main street and cheering. Four men turned into the street that we were on in a rush. They saw me waiting for them. I smiled. Telepathically I called out to Ulfberht and asked him to turn into a simple dagger. In a moment I had a dagger in my hand rather than a ring in my pinky finger. They began to smile, thinking gods were still favoring them.


    All three of them took out their swords and began to run to me. I enhanced my body with my newly found powers and everything became so slow. I could see each and every step they were taking. I threw Ulfberht into my left and jumped forward. I was just unbelievably fast for the mercenaries. In a wink, the first mercenary was facing me. I think his brain hasn¡¯t recognized what has happened yet. I punched in his face so hard that I heard sounds of cracking bones. His body was thrown to the wall of the left side. Another step and I used my left hand to stab the 2nd mercenary in the head. His body was just going down that I grabbed 3rd mercenary with my right hand, squeezed a bit and his neck was broken. All of it happened in a matter of 10-15 seconds. I released my hand and third one fall down to ground. The fourth guy who seemed to be citizen of our kingdom turned away and ran. I run towards the crowd but he was lost.


    I turned back and saw Drolan and Anthon in shock. They came to me. I smiled and¡­


    [Me]: Should we go to city center for a drink and to meet beautiful ladies?


    Next: Chapter 30 - Battle Dress</a>

 Chapter 30 - Battle Dress.

    Some of you will argue that I''m overpacing a lot. Now let me tell, I do NOT. I have a reason to do so, and in a chapter or two you will now why I did so.


    Btw, PAYLESS</a> - I added a special part for your taste


    **************************


    Chapter 30 ¨C Battle Dress.


    The next morning we departed Ark City. I thought about possibilities of who would want to assassinate our delegation and why would they? Personal grudges of Anthon and Drolan wasn¡¯t taken into account because I was attacked. Many options came to my mind but judging them I stood firmly on three alternatives. First would be Halim trying to get rid of us. Even though I worked under him he didn¡¯t like me at all, most probably he selected me personally to be sure that I¡¯m doing anything to cause problems to his future plans. Second option would be someone else with a high rank who wants to overthrow Dar or underrate Halim¡¯s capabilities by putting the word around as he couldn¡¯t even keep the delegates alive. The third option is someone or a group who is not related to government but has interests in our death and the political casualties that it may have brought up. Rest of the flight, I did what I was able to do best, I slept.


    As soon as we arrived to Mehn City, all of us were asked to come to king¡¯s palace. Conference room was full of influential people who had their share in running the kingdom. Department heads of different ministries, amir¡¯s of most provinces, sub-commanders¡¯ of battalions which were located at south, west and north of the kingdom and mayor of the Mehn were all present.


    Anthon, Drolan and I were at center of the discussion. Anthon and Drolan reported in detail about the all kinds of information what they have acquired during our visit to Demon Lord¡¯s castle. We had a break after that and had a light meal, hot drinks and cookies. In second part of the inquiry, they directed questions to all of us and I had to answer few of them too. I never told them about demon lord¡¯s gender. Zara was present at the discussions too. She had become advisor to the Minister of Finance and I heard speculations that in the next few years she was to be given position of a department head in ministry. Her being the first woman to be the minister wouldn¡¯t surprise me if it had happened in future. She told me that her workmates are going to eat out in a restaurant that weekend, and she would love to introduce me to them.


    We were relieved of duties for a week and given holidays for that time. I was renting a place close to Ministry of Defense for easy of transportation. It was a unit in a 2 floor apartment. I was living in second floor. There were 3 units in each floor. Mine was the smallest one. It was a studio.


    I goofed of all week long. Went to Mehn Academy to meet Mariette. She was doing fine. I came across to Elise and Roia over there too.


    Saturday night just after the sunset I met with Zara on Brist square which was well-known for its restaurants. We went to a place called Merakes. It was in basement of a building. Had an extraordinary design and much to my curiosity we used chop-sticks to eat the meals. We had alcoholic drink called sake with meals. It wasn¡¯t to my taste but had a few sips. Her workmates were good people, mostly women. We talked about different things and the conversation led to another and other. We had wine as we were chatting. I enjoyed the night spent with them. Lots of gossips though. I was told that Zara was engaged and she was going to marry in 4 months¡¯ time. I met a girl named Rafaelle who told me that she would be visiting economic advisor to our ministry and I would be seeing her a lot. One by one everyone went back to home.


    Zara was drunk but could control herself. We went out to boulevard so that winds could sober her up and after a 10 minute walk we went back to city to wander around. Somehow we ended up close to my apartment. I told her that I live around and she asked me to show my unit to her. We went in and I offered her tea. I went to kitchen to put to heat the water for tea. I was startled when she hugged me from behind. She was smaller than me in height, but her breasts were of decent size and I could feel them touching me softly. I turned off the heater and touched her hands with my right hand. She whispered¡­


    [Zara]: I want you¡­ to be my first.


    Scent of her perfume aroused me. We kissed for a good amount of time. Our hands began to explore each other¡¯s bodies.


    [Zara]: I have been hoping for a moment just like this.


    Father¡¯s theoretical knowledge pass down to me and Kimbra¡¯s practice lesson had their effect on me. Zara moaned all night long as we tried a lot of the stuff, which I do not want to elaborate on. She was pleased.


    After the break, Halim had few questions to me regarding the assassination and told me to keep everything that happened in secret.


    In about 3 months we got reports from southlands that at some interval but regularly animals and lesser demons have been missing and they think that it is done by the wyrm. The problem was nobody could get any facts about what had happened in southlands. Speculations were easy to make but facts were different.


    This full moon didn¡¯t affect me. I had control over my body but didn¡¯t sleep at all that night because I was afraid unconsciously I could transform into a wolf and may hurt innocent people. I was meditating a lot. Magic was not a priority to me but I learned to cast a powerful shield spell.


    I was going to different martial arts centers to have duels with practitioners. I was trying to avoid any of my powers except body strengthening in duels with martial artists.


    By age 17, I was 5¡¯10¡¯¡¯ in height and had muscular body with broad. I was known all around the Mehn City. I graduated that year from Mehn Academy though I was an intern at Ministry of Defense. That year King Dar died and Halim took over the throne. After the graduation I was now an official in Ministry of Defense and was getting paid a large sum for it. I was working in logistics and armament department as a consultant. Disgusted by the power games of factions in political and economical scene I was thinking about quitting and moving back to the village. I worked for another year for the sake of capital that I could acquire. I could marry of a girl from a powerful family too, but I did avoid that option because in that case I would be in much worse position. The job had its advantages too, which I used in my favor. I had lots of information passing through my table daily. The urbanization process was going take another step up and I was aware of Halim¡¯s plan gathering information using the data that I could get my hands on. Traders, merchants and crafting had transformed into large businesses. Service sector was paying well in comparison to village work and seemed much easier. People preferred to be waiters or accountants in city rather than having few hundred sheep back in village.


    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    I quitted my job at Ministry of Defense 2 weeks after I was 18 years old. Over the years, I had accumulated around 1200 gold. I went directly back to my village.


    My sister already had a 1-year-old son. In short time after I arrived, father died of dysfunctional liver because of too much alcohol. I knew that I did not have much time before big businesses took control over villages. When I was a kid, there were more than 40000 tribe members living in our village now there were less than 3000 left and most of them were elders.


    I bought around 500 sheep and 100 cattle. I was planning to provide milk and meat to 2 cities that had emerged to our village. Most of the people who were asking me about my future plans I was telling that I had retired as warrior but still kept training the basics in secret. Ulfberht was a good company whenever I was taking herd to feed in plateu. I did meet Mariette regularly. She was 2 years older than me, but I came to understand my feelings towards her.


    It was 12th Lain of 1513. I remember that as clearly as sky. I asked for my mother¡¯s blessing firstly. I went to Raez¡¯s house. Lynette told me that he was not around and I asked for permission to stay at their house to wait for him. Mariette brought tea and cookies. She was working as a consultant to village elder Taham. Few hours later Raez joined us. We talked about old days, laughed remembering them. They were good people. So I took advantage of the positive situation¡­


    [Me]: Raez, in God¡¯s name, I have come today to ask you for your daughter¡¯s hand in marriage. I want your and Lynette¡¯s blessing.


    I blushed red, and Mariette was kind of frozen. If you stabbed her that moment, blood wouldn¡¯t flow out. Raez smiled.


    [Raez]: If she wishes so I have nothing against your proposal.


    [Lynette]: I will respect my daughter¡¯s choice too.


    I turned towards Mariette.


    [Me]: Would you like to marry me? Would you accept me as your husband for eternity?


    Tears came out of her eyes.


    [Mariette]: YES! YES! YES!


    That day was her birthday. It was my first proper gift to her in years. In less than a month we married. Mariette moved with me to my family house. We had a peaceful life.


    Fortunately my business boomed. I was planning to expand and buy ranches in different parts of kingdom to do it in different regions. I knew I needed power and money to change the kingdom and I was getting good at money part of it. Was the system corrupting me?


    In 4th of Elaisis, just a day before my 19th birthday shaman Hitomi contacted me for a meeting at her hut around sunset. I went to her hut at promised time. Hitomi greeted me and sat on a bench outside her hut to have a hot tea. Aiki was lying around. One by one 9 people appeared as if teleported in front of us. She stood up and invited all of us into her hut. They were wearing robes with hoodies on them so their face was hidden.


    [Hitomi]: Aslan, these people are the members of the tribe council who gives approval on official warrior title of the tribesmen and women.


    [-]: We are the real village council. The ones you have heard of are just for show.


    [-]: We will not tell you who we are but our organization is older than you can imagine and we have own vows to held.


    [-]: Dangerous clouds are flying over the world¡­


    [-]: We have selected many warriors to protect it when the time comes. You are one of them.


    [-]: We know everything. How you have kept training art of war and magic.


    One of them came close to me and chanted something.


    [-]: You are now an official warrior of Tribe of Kali. You have time until tomorrow sunrise to present an armor to Hitomi to be sent to us for dwarfs to cast magic on it, or in a week¡¯s time you will be given an armor for your use when the time comes.


    They disappeared one by one.


    [Hitomi]: You have anything on your mind about armor?


    [Me]: Yes, can you come over with me please. I¡¯ll give it to you now.


    We went back to my family house. I digged up everything that belonged to me from basement. I found it. The wolf that had been stuffed long time ago when I had killed it. I took out bedding from its inside and gave the rest to Hitomi.


    [Me]: I would like magic to be casted onto it.


    The wolf¡¯s head was as if it was alive. I cut its fur horizontally from its jaw to crotch. In less than week I had my new armor. I knotted wolf¡¯s front legs around my neck. Its full body was covering my spine. I thought having its apex on top of my head and its front upper fangs down to sides of my eyes made me look more vulgar and intimate, which was a perfect fit for a battle dress.


    Next: Chapter 31 - Around Them</a>

 Chapter 31 - Around Them.

    Few more chapters left until we end up this arc and begin the real story.


    ***************************


    Chapter 31 ¨C Around Them.


    I began to enjoy my life to the fullest. I had a beautiful wife, nice mother and means to provide them good life. Mariette told me to help out elder people of the village by providing financial aid to them without hurting their pride. Once in a month, I was going to Mayumana city to purchase flour, sugar, rice and dried tea leafs in bulk. Mariette was packaging them into equal amounts into 50 bags and at night we were putting those bags in front of the doors of those who were in need of basic products. As a result of Halim¡¯s social and economic policies old ways such as treating elders, supporting parents when they older were part of history now. Mariette was the only right choice what I had made in my life until I married her. We were well off but her thoughts were always with the people. Sometimes I thought she didn¡¯t have an ego.


    The second most important part of my old life was 19th of Mut, 1514. Spring was taking back lands from winter¡¯s hands. That day Mariette was feeling weak and had a headache. She threw up whatever she ate. I thought she got flu but my mother told me that she seemed to be pregnant. We checked with Hitomi and she confirmed saying she felt a new life inside her. My happiness couldn¡¯t be bound to skies, mountains. Nothing could contain it.


    As spring came the lands got green again. It was time to take herd to uphill to Kastiff Mountain range. I would take them myself and come back around few steps before winter would. I had Ulfberht with me and took skinned wolf with me just in case if I get attacked. More than 4 months of travel time had passed and I knew I had to get back. I could identify Mount Swizz which meant we had come a long way. It took around 3 months to get back to Mount Retnus as we didn¡¯t lag for herd to feed more than it should. Close to Mount Retnus¡¯s range I met Aban. He was an old tribesman who I admired. A man of honor. His clothes were burned down, he seemed too weak to walk, was just lying on ground as if to welcome his death. I was worried. I tried to help to him but he stopped me¡­


    [Aban]: As¡­lan¡­


    I gave him water to sip a bit¡­His heartbeat was getting slower.


    [Aban]: terrifying. It was terrifying¡­


    [Me]: Uncle Aban what has happened?


    [Aban]: A¡­atta¡­


    He died on my hands. I was in shock.


    [Me]: What happened? Answer me!!!!!!


    I stood up. Calmed myself and concentrated. I teleported to front part of shaman Hitomi¡¯s hut. I couldn¡¯t believe my eyes. There were smokes coming out of village. It was burnt down to dust. Nothing was left of it. I went to my house. Nothing, not a single thing was there to prove that it was a house once upon a time. Burnt and smoked bricks were all what remained. I ran to village center, there were few survivors of whatever had happened.


    This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.


    I was told that around 6 months ago a black dragon emerged somewhere in land of Tat¡¯s. It flew towards west destroying everything what was in sight. Mehn City was razed to nothing in less than a day¡¯s time. After that it had attacked 3rd bridge. Later on changing its direction to north and west again. A month ago it had attacked our village, burning it down to nothing in a matter of hour by blazing fires all around. It flew to south afterwards. My mother and Mariette hadn¡¯t survived. The kid which I never got to have died. I was in anger. All what was left of the village of the Great Kali were few survivors. I concentrated all my thoughts on fort close to 1st bridge. I teleported there. It was snowing and large smokes were coming out of fort. The clouds were in dark black color and white snow was pouring down to earth.


    Dragon had passed through here too. I felt weak. I hadn¡¯t teleported to long distances at all, my mana had diminished while using it to teleport and I had fatigue because of instant long distance travel. Few surviving warriors came by me. They gave me food and water. We stayed there overnight and in the morning left to southlands. They were real warriors. They wouldn¡¯t ran away but fight until the end even if it cost their lives. We used horses to travel. In a month travel time whatever we passed by was burnt down to ashes.


    I could sense few but very powerful presences in a distance. It was a month that we had departed 1st bridge. What I saw disturbed my mind. Corpses of demons of different tribes all around. Burnt but not as bad as in human lands. I could see Kimbra in distance, there were 2 more demons with her. I couldn¡¯t recognize them as it was a long distance and vision got blurry. I was aware and sure of one thing. The Black Dragon. It was running around them.


    ***************************


    P.S: The picture was taken from HERE</a>. I cropped it into style which I liked and put focus on his eyes and everything else in the picture is blurred. I liked the eyes and rest of the MC is left to your imagination.


    Next: Chapter 32 - Motionless.</a>

 Chapter 32 - Motionless.

    Feel free to comment your thoughts.


    *************************


    Chapter 32 ¨C Motionless!


    Destroyer of my dreams, my family, my relatives, my world was few hundred meters away from me. It was running, jumping and flying in a circle around Kimbra and few demons. Wind that emerged after its wing-beat could be felt from where I was standing. Feelings of anger and revenge were consuming me but I knew that rushing towards the dragon in this state would bring death to me and bring my end rather than its.


    I chanted spell for shield to appear around me for protection against dragon¡¯s fire breath. I increased the amount of mana channeled to shield to make it as stronger as I could. I took off as soon as I was ready. I was running as faster as cheetah would. Ulfberht turned into a sword before I reached the place where fighting was going on. Dragon landed on the opposite facing me on two legs; Kimbra and few demons were shocked to see. I saw faint smile on Kimbra¡¯s face. Dragon¡¯s body came down landing on its front two legs and it opened its mouth wide. I could see the sparks. It was going to breath fire out. I ran to Kimbra, I had to protect her. I transformed. My speed got a lot faster and I reached her in time. Increased the size of shield by pouring a lot more mana into it. The fire already was flowing and pushing the shield. I could feel the heat but it couldn¡¯t breach the shield. Massive amount of fire was passing by us. It was only Kimbra and I in the shield and everywhere else was covered in fire. Instantly, last wave of fire came by simultaneously dragon began to crawl towards us. I grabbed on Kimbra¡¯s shoulder with my left arm and used all of my force to throw her backwards away from the battle. I didn¡¯t want to lose anybody else. She dropped somewhere back and lay there unconscious. As dragon was getting closer to me, its head turned a right side to ground. It opened its mouth to catch me. I jump up in direction where dragon was coming from. It saw me up on air and using its rear legs pushed it body up changing its trajectory. I had both of my hands on Ulfberht¡¯s hilt. I slashed it as hard as I could in my transformed state. I was successful as I cut through dragon¡¯s tooth. Pain had dragon to lose its balance, it felt to ground but got on four legs very fast. It roared. Instinctively I howled. Its roar and my howling was shaking ground that we were standing on.


    We began to walk in circle watching each other closely. Dragon again tried to bit me; though I couldn¡¯t hit it, I jumped and evaded its attack. As soon as I landed on ground dragon¡¯s tail¡¯s was coming my way and I barely had time to avoid it so I attacked it as strong as I could. Ulfberht¡¯s went all the way through dragon¡¯s tail but could only scratch it. I was shocked. There was nothing Ulfberht couldn¡¯t cut through and dragon was just scratched. Dragon shook its head and looked at its tail. I grinned. I had a chance. It was possible to kill it.


    Our battle last for hours and we didn¡¯t reach any conclusion. Dragon was injured in few places and was bleeding and my strength and mana were diminishing. This time when we clashed with each other I cut its left wing and it screamed hard. Blood was rushing out and it turned its head back and burned its own wing base. It was the hard way but most probably only way for dragon to survive. Our eyes met for first time. I could sense its stares.


    I had lost my kid, my wife and my mother. I couldn¡¯t even see my kid¡¯s face, s/he wasn¡¯t born yet. I wasn¡¯t 21 years old yet either. Cumaja¡¯s curse and what had happened that day long time ago flashed in front of my eyes. Was it curse¡¯s doings what had happened to my happy life or was it destiny? It didn¡¯t matter any more.


    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.


    It began to rain. I knew it. It was not curse. It was destiny.


    I attacked again. I had new cut on dragon¡¯s face. It¡¯s massive body was and advantage and disadvantage at the same time. I could out-maneuver it easily. Its skin was as hard as Ulfberht but not enough. We clashed few more times. It wasn¡¯t as agile as before because of one less wing on its body. It couldn¡¯t adapt to new conditions. I over-maneuvered it and jumped onto its face and stabbed Ulfberht into its eye. Blood was gushing out. It began to shake its head but I took out and stabbed Ulfberht a few more times before I was thrown away.


    It went down. I stood up and walked to it. It was in pain. It was lying on ground and it opened it mouth for the first time as if talking¡­


    [Dragon]: Human¡­


    I kept walking but my strength was going away.


    [Me]: I will kill you.


    [Dragon]: Human¡­


    It began to chant some spell. It was a language, which I couldn¡¯t understand. I tried to increase my pace to reach it but I couldn¡¯t.


    Lots of circles began to appear me on the center and surrounding both of us. I couldn¡¯t move, I did my best but couldn¡¯t. The circles were limiting my advancement, halting me. I put my last strength into it and was able to come as close as to dragon for a distance of a step or two between us.


    [Dragon]: This is the only spell known to me. It doesn¡¯t matter anymore. You will die with me.


    A bright light flashed all over. I closed my eyes to not get blinded by the light. I opened my eyes. It was like I was a in an all white room but I couldn¡¯t identify where the walls. It was like I was in another dimension. I tried to move but couldn¡¯t. I had my right leg in front of my left leg. Both my hands were holding Ulfberht on its hilt, my arms in the air. I remembered that I was going to kill the dragon. I fully opened my eyes and dragon was in front of me in the same space as me. It began to shrink down. Turning to a small black wyrm. It couldn¡¯t move either. Though it did move its eyes, as I was able to. I felt powerful again. I felt my body strengthened again as if nothing had occurred.


    I began to hear a smooth voice that seemed to belong to a girl or woman.


    [-]: Ket Hu Aid Eil. RIB EV AY XO. INEM SHEID BAVAC INVER!


    After hearing that the words automatically came out of my mouth.


    [Me]: Yes, I accept!


    [Wyrm]: Yes, I accept!


    The place where we were brightened and light flashed again. I did close my eyes.


    I could feel the breeze. I opened my eyes. There was a forest facing me few hundred meters away. I couldn¡¯t move my body but I could move my eyes; I looked down and saw black wyrm again. There were magical circles on ground again. They disappeared.


    [Wyrm]: Human, I will kill you.


    It breathed fire but it didn¡¯t even last for few seconds and it never reached me. I think it wasn¡¯t aware of its size yet. I was still in the position in which we were transported. I put all my strength and attacked wyrm. It barely left alive just before Ulfberht reaching it jumped to left. I was going for second attack when I heard.


    [-]: STOP!


    My body stopped on its own and wyrm was motionless too.


    Next: Chapter 33- Luna.</a>

 Chapter 33 - Luna.

    Chapter 33 ¨C Luna.


    PRESENT TIME


    I am frozen again. I cannot move body at all. The voice that gave order had full control over me. I am standing vis-¨¤-vis with wyrm. I can hear voices of people talking from my left.


    [-]: Unbelievable!


    [-]: Look at the black wyrm.


    [-]: That orphan girl did this?


    [-]: Not one but two of them.


    [-]: The second one is a monster with human body and wolf¡¯s head.


    Silence fell¡­


    [-]: Silence. Impressive Luna. Very impressive. I have heard stories of two beings to be summoned but it¡¯s my first time seeing it.


    [Luna]: Thank you teacher Brom. It was all thanks to your supervision and teachings.


    [Brom]: Hahaa. Luna you are too modest. Now, they seem to be rebellious. Order them to face us and explain them what they are and what will happened if they try to cause ruckus! They will not be able to answer but they will understand what you are telling them.


    [Luna]: Face me!


    My body moved on its own and wyrm turned to face the voice too. There are lots of boys and girls standing opposite to us. I think they are around 15-16 years old. Girls have blouse, tunic dress and pinafore on them. Boys are wearing long trousers and blazers.


    There is this girl with blue eyes and blue hair color standing in front of them with a man around age of 30 by her. She has very long hair almost up to her waist. There is a white headband with clear crystal flower around her forehead. Her cheeks are like a rose, and lips look like one unfurling in the first light of morning. The man besides her had a long trousers and a jacket on him. The jacket features decorative peak, delicately broadened seams, V chest shape and overlaid notch. It is first time I am seeing clothing such as the ones these boys, girl and the man is wearing.


    I raised my hand up to my forehead and threw wolf¡¯s head back to my shoulders. Whispers again.


    [-]: He is no monster.


    [-]: Beautiful.


    The blue girl stepped forward¡­


    [Luna]: I am Luna Von Raden of the Wallington House. I have summoned you two as my familiars. You are bound to me for eternity as much as I am alive. If you attack each other again, both of you will be punished.


    A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    [Brom]: Now name them.


    She nodded in acceptance.


    Wyrm roared. I think it was getting tired of listening to them. Though I assume it had no idea that it has shrinked back to a wyrm. Normally its roar should raise panic and struck horror into their hearts but right now it sounds as if somebody is whistling in a low pitch tone.


    [Wyrm]: Nobody punishes Gorn the Dark One! Gorn decides on judgement! Girl if you utter a word more, you will have the worst imaginable death.


    [-]: The baby dragon is mumbling something as if it wants to talk.


    I was able to understand the wyrm but I think nobody understood it.


    [Me]: Luna was it?


    Their faces take form of astonishment which seems they didn¡¯t expect me to talk.


    [Me]: Gorn says that if you utter a word more, you will have the worst imaginable death!


    [-]: He speaks¡­ (Everybody whispering)


    She raises the wand in her hand.


    [Luna]: miril!


    Lightening comes out of the wand and strikes Gorn.


    [Me]: He deserves more than that.


    [Me]: I am Aslan of Kali tribe. I think I¡¯m in land of Tat¡¯s now. I don¡¯t know how I came to be here but I¡¯m going away now and will be taking this wyrm with me. Goodbye!


    I grab Gorn on its neck. I turn around and see lots of building and forest behind us. I decide to ask them the way to our kingdom.


    [Me]: Which way shall take me to Kingdom of Kali?


    I hear laughs all around.


    Whispers again.


    [-]: Her familiars are as odd as her!


    [-]: Oprhan child of a dead duke who can¡¯t even control her familiars.


    [Luna]: miril!!!


    Lightning strikes me this time. I feel pain going through each and every cell of my body. I fall on my knees. Feeling powerless.


    [Luna]: Do not make me to repeat myself again.


    [Brom]: We should inform headmaster about your summoning. You all wait here. Let¡¯s go Luna.


    Next: Chapter 34 - We Have</a>

 Chapter 34 - We Have.

    I have read your comments on chapter 33 regarding the twist in story and its results. Most of the people who had written comments were totally against how the story ended up and some refuse to read anymore(up to you fellas).


    Now from early chapters on I told you guys that the first part is like an introduction and it''s not the real story. Real story began on chapter 33. Up to 33 you get to know who Aslan is and what''s his background.


    I have enjoyed writing past 33 chapters and I will do so for the future ones. I''ll do my best to inject reader suggestions into the story but plot is going to be as is. I have planned it and I''m not going to change it.


    Thanks for your kind attention!


    ***********************


    Chapter 34 ¨C We Have.


    I don¡¯t know how this has happened but I¡¯m going back to Kingdom of Kali. Closing my eyes I channel some mana to engulf my body. I call upon wolf¡¯s power and begin to transform. My hair is growing fast. I can feel them touching my shoulders. I stand up and open my eyes. I chant the spell for the shield, it appears and surrounds me like a slightly visible ball.


    [Me]: Which way is to Kingdom of Kali?


    Mana began to flow out of my body and kids in the uniform began to tremble. Brom chanted something, tens of fireballs began to appear out of his wand¡¯s tip and attack me. Fireballs crashed to the mana shield and explosion occurred. Smoke covering their vision they panicked more. My sense were strengthened so I am able to hear, see and feel many times better than a normal human. Everyone was running away except two. Smoke cleared; Luna and Brom haven¡¯t moved anywhere. I think Brom didn¡¯t expect me to be standing. Most probably, he had some other scenario going through his mind. His eyelids got wide as he saw me without a scratch.


    I teleported and appeared on a new location which was just an arm away from him. I grab his wand with my left middle and index finger on top and my left thumb on bottom. I put a bit of force to my fingers and his wand breaks into two. He is standing still as if he is a statue. I do not want to hurt anyone so I turn to Luna.


    [Me]: Which way is to Kingdom of Kali?


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.[Luna]: There is no Kingdom of Kali. Don¡¯t you understand? You are using Grand Master level magic and you do not know what summoning is?


    [Me]: What happened? Where am I?


    [Luna]: You have died back in wherever you were before. The summoning magic brings beings from the void. The place where souls stay before judgment takes place.


    This time the one who was in shock was I. I could not grasp the idea.


    [Me]: I was alive! I didn¡¯t die!


    [Luna]: Were you injured in your old world?


    [Me] Yes.


    [Luna]: When did your wounds go away?


    [Me]: I was in a bright place. Dragon was there too. It shrank back to wyrm and I turned to my normal self.


    [Luna]: That bright place is called void. You have to do die to enter it. I do not know exactly what happens there but you have your memories of the old world is weird.


    [Luna]: Professor Brom, I want to talk to my familiar in private, I will join you in headmaster¡¯s office later with my familiars.


    He nodded.


    [Luna]: Would you please come with me?


    I followed her. She was going towards a beautiful tree. The sun is shining down on it. Pink flowers are glowing softly. A gentle breeze rustles the leaves. I had never seen a tree as beautiful as this one. She sat on a bench near the tree.


    [Luna]: It¡¯s called Sakura.


    Was she reading my mind?


    [Luna]: I¡¯m Luna von Raden. My father was Duke of Wallington. He was assassinated two years ago with my mother. My uncle took over his title to rule until I get old enough to replace him. I was sent to Rinelts Academy a year ago. I¡¯m 16. Today we were supposed to summon familiar to fight with us in battles and wars. I may seem to you as selfish girl but I have my share of problems. I want you to help me! I want you to share your power with me for the righteousness to win.


    [Me]: What do I get in return?


    [Luna]: We will search for a way for you to return back your world!


    Silence¡­


    [Me]: How?


    [Lune]: Do we have a deal?


    [Me]: We have.


    Next: Chapter 35 - Luna''s homeland.</a>

 Chapter 35 - Lunas homeland.

    Chapter 35 ¨C Luna¡¯s homeland.


    [Me]: Before we leave, you had a different tone when I was summoned. The attitude what you are showing right now is total opposite to that. What made you change?


    [Luna]: I haven¡¯t met or heard of anybody breaking opponents wand in a fight using his fingers. You have power and I want you besides me at all costs even it means losing you at some point in future. I want to find killers of my parents. I want to punish them.


    We left to headmaster¡¯s office, Luna leading the way, wyrm and me following.


    I can leave Luna and go my way and search for a way back to my world but it may take longer and I may actually never find a way at all. I am a warrior, not a proper magus. I will need proper guidance from magicians of this world. I have a good experience as a government bureaucrat, I had been member of diplomatic delegate, I had attended commissions and conferences held by Ministry of Finance; I can help her out to be the Duchess of her late father¡¯s dukedom. That way I may have easy access to lots of information and resources. As a result I still face two problems to be solved as soon as possible. First and foremost is Gorn. I have to kill him to revenge the death of my wife, mother and unborn kid. Unfortunately because of the summoning bond I can not do much now. Second problem is to decide if Luna is worthy to become the Duchess of Wallington.


    [Luna]: Hey! Hey!


    [Me]: Are you talking to me?


    [Luna]: Were you daydreaming?


    [Me]: Yeah, I was lost in thought.


    We were standing in front of a big building.


    [Luna]: We are here. This is the headmaster¡¯s residence.


    I nod.


    [Luna]: It¡¯s a bit late  for proper introduction but I¡¯m Luna von Raden.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Aslan of Kali tribe.


    [Wyrm]:¡­¡­¡­. (Only I understood the wyrm)


    [Me]: He is Gorn the Dark One. We will be in your care, Luna.


    Doors opened and we entered the building. A man looking around 40 years of age was standing in front of us. He came towards us.


    [-]: I¡¯m Irakliy, headmaster¡¯s butler and loyal servant.


    [Luna]: I¡¯m Luna von Raden of Wallington House.


    [Irakliy]: Headmaster Buhsdorf and Professor Brom are waiting for you. Follow me.


    We walked upon wide stairs to second floor of building. We entered the main room on second floor. There were many bookshelves filled with books. A black haired woman was sitting on an armchair by a wooden table, which had lots of books, documents and papers on it.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    [Irakliy]: Headmaster Buhsdorf, the student and her familiar have arrived.


    [Buhsdorf]: I have told you many times, call me Sheila.


    [Irakliy]: But headmaster¡­


    [Sheila]: Enough Irakliy, you may leave.


    [Brom]: Headmaster - look at them, a wyrm and a human. It is as I have told you.


    Sheila stood up and closed the distance between us. She had jacquard patterned sweaterknit skirt on her showing her long and slender legs. Her shirt had rich prints and bohemian paisley patterns, fringe as a top layer made her look like the epitome of sexiness.  She bended a bit to touch wyrm''s head.


    [Sheila]: It¡¯s not just a wyrm. It¡¯s a dark one.


    Light appeared from tips of her fingers and covered wyrm for an instant.


    [Sheila]: Now talk!


    [Gorn]: I will destroy the whole world but I will spare you because you recognized who the Gorn is.


    [Sheila]: Hahaa. You have big ambitions.


    [Sheila]: Professor Brom you may leave too. I¡¯ll handle the rest.


    She patted wyrm¡¯s head.


    [Sheila]: Thank you sweetie.


    Damned wyrm licked her hand. It was making a move on her.


    As soon as, Brom left the room.


    [Luna]: Aunt Sheila it is nice to meet you again.


    They hugged.


    [Sheila]: Likewise Luna. I was afraid you would be killed too so I requested your attendance to classes in Rinelts. I sent the acceptance letters and payment slip to your uncle so that I could protect you. You are safe here.


    [Luna]: You met Gorn. This is Aslan. He is my familiar too.


    [Sheila]: Nice to meet you Aslan.


    I nod again.


    [Sheila]: there is something within you, which is part of you but are not of human origin. Are you a hybrid?


    [Me]: No, it¡¯s a gift bestowed upon me by a long dead demon lord.


    [Sheila]: Luna - lay low and do not cause any kind of ruckus anymore. It¡¯s your first year, and in few weeks summer holidays will arrive. I¡¯ll arrange a holiday house for you.


    I sensed Luna got tensed up hearing Sheila¡¯s plans regarding her.


    [Me]: Thanks for the offer but I think we will be going to Luna¡¯s homeland.


    [Luna]: Aunt Sheila do you know any kind of spell to send Aslan back to his world?


    [Sheila]: I do not know, but there a few people who I know may have the answer!


    Next: Chapter 36 - The Dearest</a>

 Chapter 36 - The Dearest.

    Chapter 36 ¨C The Dearest.


    [Luna]: Why did you tell her that we would be going back my house?


    [Me]: I was just checking out your determination of ambitions of yours. The best way to rule is to know what is happening in your lands, what people think of their rulers. If you do not want to cut bonds with your people and dukedom, you have to visit at least twice a year. You will know what is happening around and they will not forget you.


    She had a sad smile on her face. I do not know what was going through her mind.


    [Me]: Luna, nobody is born as a natural leader. You have to cultivate those skills that could make you a good Duchess and maybe a queen in the future. To change everything, you have to begin from yourself first.


    Three weeks passed. Luna was attending classes and Gorn was always around her. I did go to library a lot. For past three weeks I learned a lot from books and Luna. This world consists of one big continent which has been enclosed with large amount of water.


    Cursed Lands is the name of western parts of the continent. No human lived there, it is a natural habitat for creatures which are not of human origins. The most dangerous to humans out of all the creatures that lived there were Cyclops. Luna had never seen one just heard about them. In the books it was written that they are giants that could be as tall as 20 meters with a body similar to humans but had only one eye on their forehead. Intelligence wise they were not on par with humans either. The most interesting thing which I read was that creatures of Cursed Lands almost never left their habitat but when they did great wars occurred. The part of the continent was called Cursed Lands but in reality from all the sources which I read those parts of the continent were like heaven on this world. It¡¯s only once in a few decades that lands would get dry and inhabitants of the Cursed Lands will march to other parts of the continent to survive.


    There were 5 kingdoms. We were in Kingdom of Marlings. It was a big kingdom. Luna¡¯s great-grandfather Wallington had accomplished great heroic deeds during the war with creatures of Cursed Lands and was awarded the title of Duke and lands to rule over by king. Luna¡¯s father was the descendant of Duke Wallington. He had married Mikele Buhsdorf out of love who was the elder sister of Sheila Buhsdorf. A year ago, both of them had been assassinated and 15 year old Luna von Raden was sent to Rinelts to study magic while her uncle Armand Von Raden was ruling in her place.


    [Me]: You do not have any friends, do you?


    [Luna]: I have few.


    [Me]: Really?


    [Luna]: Okay. It is just I was too depressed this year. I was focused on reading and practicing a lot to summon a great familiar.


    [Me]: Hahaa¡­ I knew a person who was not fit to be a warrior or mage but was controlling a kingdom in a way that you could not grasp. Power has different forms and it does not always has to be in the form of brute strength.


    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    [Luna]: What you mean?


    [Me]: Let¡¯s assume for a moment that you found out the people who ordered and assassinated your parents. You get your revenge. So what then?


    [Luna]: I¡¯ll rule over my people and territory.


    [Me]: Believe me doing that is much harder than finding the assassins and their employers. Anyway, tomorrow we are leaving to Wallington house, don¡¯t we?


    [Luna]: Yes, tomorrow in the morning.


    She was on horse, while wyrm and me were walking. By the end of the first day she told us that if everything goes as smooth as this it would take less than 10 days to reach her home. We stayed at a local inn in a village for night and in the morning continued our trip to her future domain.


    In fifth day of our travel we stayed in another inn where Luna had wine for the first time. She drank more than she could handle.


    [Luna]: I amm no-ooo-oot a kid anymoooore.


    [Me]: What are you going to do now as a grown up?


    [Luna]: I wiii-llll declare myself as duchhhess of Waaallington when weee reaaachh mine dooomain.


    [Me]: What then?


    [Luna]: I do nooot¡­


    She was right on spot about the travel time. We passed by a village and road was leading to a hill. Luna said that her house was just over the hill. On top of the hill we saw what she referred to as house being a chateau amid magnificently landscaped formal gardens. Flowerbeds, tree-lined paths, fountains and ponds were laid out around the chateau. I was astonished at the decorations of every moulding, cornice, ceiling and door of the interior with the most lavish and flamboyant of appointments: frescos, marble, gilt and woodcarvings. A female servant attended us and showed us to her room.


    Her room is thrice the size of my old house and if sold with its furniture, paintings and golden statues could close the budget deficit of a small country.


    [Luna]: We should meet my uncle.


    [Me]: Whatever you wish princess.


    She blushed. We walked through many corridors and entered a hall room which had colored frescos all over the walls and ceiling.


    [Me]: Who is the man that is depicted in almost all of the frescos?


    [Luna]: My great-grandfather. It¡¯s his heroic deeds that are depicted on frescos.


    A man on his 40s entered the hall room.


    [Luna]: Uncle Armand! Nice to see you.


    [Armand]: Likewise Luna! I didn¡¯t expect you to come back so early. I was expecting to see you in 4 years.


    [Luna]: I came to attend the matters of duchy by your side and to get experience in matters of governing the dukedom.


    [Armand]: You have grown up, my lovely niece.


    What Armand did not know was that I could sense the difference in his breathing and heartbeat after Luna asserted her own feelings to the person who she thought as the dearest.


    Next: Chapter 37 - thank you!</a>

 Chapter 37 - thank you!

    Chapter 37 ¨C thank you!


    [Me]: I am sorry but it¡¯s time to meditate.


    [Armand]: So the rumors of a talking familiar was true.


    [Luna]: He is human!


    [Armand]: A familiar is a familiar! You should have total control over them!


    [Me]: Is this how you treat the Duchess? By commanding her?


    [Armand]: I am¡­


    [Me]: You are ruling instead of Luna until she is ready to take over. It does not make you duke of this territory.


    [Luna]: We will be away for few hours. By the time, I come back I was all the laws that has been passed during my absence to be present in my room. I want all our subjects to be present in a week¡¯s time in my presence to be addressed in matters of dukedom.


    [Armand]: Yes, my lady!


    [Luna]: Aslan! Gorn! We should go now!


    A male and female servant followed us until we reached an arbor. To my surprise, it had a simple design. It had lattice panels which was ideal for climbing plants. Grape leaves had covered most of its outer side. She wanted to sit on wooden bench inside the arbor but I neglected the idea and told her to sit on ground with me. Servants were shocked. I telepathically contacted Ulfberht and asked him to turn into sword. Light appeared on my right hands pinky finger and massive sword materialized.


    [Luna]: It¡¯s the sword that you had when you were summoned!


    [Aslan]: His name is Ulfberht.


    [Luna]: Wow, it has a name?


    [Aslan]: Not it, but HE!


    [Luna]: You mean he is alive?


    [Aslan]: Yes! Now Luna, what I want you is to order Gorn to protect us while we will be meditating.


    [Luna]: Gorn protect us during meditation!


    I showed her lotus position. She had problems but was able to comfortable sit in a matter of minutes. I put Ulfberht hilt so that it touched her legs. I positioned myself too.


    [Me]: Now close your eyes! Slowly breathe in through you nose and breathe out through your mouth. Repeat it three more times. As you breathe in and breathe, feel your body relaxing to the point where you sense no more your body or anything of this world. You are surrounded by darkness. Now do not be afraid, as you will see a tall blonde man. Do not be afraid of him and let him show you the way¡­


    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.


    I saw her deep in meditation so I closed my eyes and meditated myself.


    I am standing on the shore and waves are hitting it smoothly. It is so peaceful. Ulfberht appeared and Luna was holding his hand.


    [Me]: You made it on first try. Good on you, Luna!


    [Luna]: Where are we?


    [Me]: Inside me. Ulfberht are you going to stay?


    [Ulfberht]: I will pass, I¡¯m not on good terms with the wolfie.


    [Me]: Hahaa


    [Luna]: A wolf? You mean a monster?


    [Me]: Calm down and follow me.


    Ulfberht disappeared. Luna was guided by me to top of the hill where my throne was. I sat on it.


    [Luna]: So beautiful.


    The wolf and the other presence appeared though wolf was the only one in a materialized form. It was sitting on my left in a sleeping position. It opened its eyes.


    [Wolf]: I though we agreed on, no more guests policy.


    [Luna]: It talks!


    [Me]: I want to share some of my powers with her, I think she deserves it. I wanted your approval so I brought her.


    [Wolf]: I won¡¯t allow my powers to be shared.


    Silence fell¡­


    [-]: a bit is okay, I think.


    [Me]: Thank you!


    [Luna]: What¡¯s happening?


    [Me]: We should go, Luna.


    We went back all the way to the shore.


    [Me]: Luna, I think you are a na?ve girl with lack of power but a lot of big ambitions. Back in my world, when I was fighting Gorn, he did some kind of magic spell and we were transferred to the void that you talk of and most probably you could summon us because we didn¡¯t belong to the space and time. What I want to say is that you are lucky. You are lucky to summon me, you are lucky to meet me. I will help you out now too. But do not forget what you have promised to me.


    [Luna]: Stop that!


    [Me]: I am just stating the facts. Now drink the water.


    She kneeled down, used her right hand to get handful of the water and drank it. She disappeared and I opened my eyes.


    She was smiling. She kissed me on right cheek.


    [Luna]: thank you!


    Next: Chapter 38 - For Years.</a>

 Chapter 38 - For Years.

    I have favor to ask from loyal readers. I was checking out "Wolf''s Cry"s page tonight and saw many negative reviews with very low score ratings. I am not asking you to add 5 star ratings or reviews but please be a bit more active and rate/review according to what you think about this story.


    ***********************


    Chapter 38 ¨C For Years.


    A week passed. I taught her how to put on a mana shield around her for protection. She was much more talented than me, as her mana shield was invisible but mine could be detected by bare eyes even from a long distance as if I was standing inside a giant glassy ball. Unknown to me, she had a childhood friend called Celestria von Raden. Her only friend who was her cousin at the same time. Celestria was 21 years old, but they had grown in the same place and were very close from the childhood days.


    It was the day of the meeting with the subjects of the duchy. Luna had to counts, earls, marquises and so on at conference hall for discussions regarding the state of duchy. At sunset there is going be a ball where families of the subjects would attend.


    Luna had done her homework well. There were some points risen by her during the hearings which were welcomed by subjects. She overruled new tax rise act applied by her uncle that was praised by all of the attendees and had a positive effect on her image as the future duchess. Armand von Raden was dissatisfied with the meeting and most probably with Luna¡¯s rising popularity amongst attendees.


    Wyrm and I were the only familiars who were allowed to attend both meeting and ball. I knew that wyrm was disinterested in stuff like these as for him the only way to solve out the problem was to erase it. So most of the time he was sleeping beside the Luna during the meeting and was watching attendees of the ball from the balcony. I was involved in both meeting and ball intensively. I offered few new laws, which would help them out with the formation of regular paid army rather than forcing people to take arms in case of a war.


    Parents of youth were interested in parties such as the one Luna von Raden was holding today as a chance for them to introduce their kids to each other. Balls were very popular among the young nobles as it was one of the few opportunities they had to meet and socialize with those of the opposite sex, maybe even find a spouse. Females mostly had a simple all-in one dress or tunic gathered with strings at the neck and just under the bust line. They had colored ribbons or scarfs as extra decorations to their simple clothing. Females and males only had white gloves in common. Men mostly had single or double-breasted coats over pantaloons. Some men had white bands as neck wear, some had cravats. I was the only outstanding person in the crowd. I had black leather pants on me. On top I had a white shirt, and wolf skin was covering my neck, its head and body staying over my spine. I remembered some of the noble youth from Rinelts.


    Everyone was enjoying the night by talking, dancing, drinking. Luna was beside me when I noticed Armand von Raden going out of the ballroom. I asked Luna to follow me. Count Philistos J¨¹licher and Marquis Selinah Lucchi came with us. We put distance in between Armand and us but tried not lose him. He was moving fast. He ended up in stable where horses were kept. We were behind the doors but Celestria von Raden and Armand von Raden were so into arguing that they weren¡¯t aware of anyone.


    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    [Celestria]: You had one job!


    [Armand]: What do you expect me to do?


    [Celestria]: She had to die too!


    [Armand]: I killed my brother and his wife for you! Because you wished for power! I can¡¯t do that to 16-year-old innocent kid!


    [Celestria]: You had to, dad! You had to! We will be in second row again. She had summoned two familiars, which will be in her favour and her attendance this time¡­


    Luna waited no more. She barged in and stared at them for some time before¡­


    [Luna]: Count Philistos, arrest them and keep them in basement jail of the chateau. I¡¯ll make my decision tomorrow. If by any chance, they escape ¨C you better be ready for consequences.


    She lay on her bed but didn¡¯t sleep. I do not like barging into family matters so I kept my thoughts to myself.


    All of the attendees of the ball were present in afternoon at the chateau. Everyone surrounded tennis court by Luna¡¯s order. Celestria and Armand were brought into the court.


    [Luna]: You are all here to observe and witness the end of Armand and Celestria von Radens. They have betrayed the trust of this duchy by ordering the assassination of the old duke and his wife. They will be punished accordingly.


    Everyone was silent as if waiting for what kind of punishment will be used.


    [Luna]: Because of their blood relations to me, I¡¯ll give them chance to protect themselves using their familiars.


    [Celestria]: You think you have grown up?


    [Luna]: Gorn, what kinds of meal do you like best?


    [Gorn]: Demons are the most delicious but instead of animals I prefer humans.


    Celestria¡¯s face turned white after hearing what Gorn had said. Armand was on his knees repenting for his sins. Celestria¡¯s familiar, a bobcat, was brought to tennis court.


    Gorn was ruthless. I think he enjoyed the bobcat¡¯s meat more than Celestria and Armand¡¯s as it was a summoned familiar.


    He played around with bobcat giving it chances to think it could kill Gorn but halted bobcat¡¯s attacks the last moment. He dismembered bobcat before eating it up. Armand was still on his knees; I think he had gone crazy. Celestria though was grasping the reality of situation as moments passed by. She tried few spells but none of them were effective against the wymr. Gorn was a sadist. It didn¡¯t attack swiftly; it made slow steps around her. She was desperate and had pissed herself. Most probably that¡¯s why Gorn didn¡¯t eat her but killed in a way that was not known to any being with consciousness. Armand did not resist. Gorn ate him swiftly.


    [Marquis Selinah Lucchi]: Today shall be the lesson to be learned from. Duchess Luna von Raden will not spare anyone who will betray the dukedom.


    [Luna]: Terra firma!!! (She screamed)


    [-]: TERRA FIRMA!!!


    We stayed until sunset as people went away one by one, seeing Luna first and kissing her hand referring to their loyalty to her.


    We went to her room.


    [Gorn]: You made the right choice.


    I saw tears on her eyes and hugged her. She cried. She cried so hard as if she has not cried for years.


    Next: Chapter 39 - Show off!</a>

 Chapter 39 - Show off!

    I wanted to write it for long time but was forgetting each time I was posting a chapter. It¡¯s about Aslan¡¯s father, why he had hatred towards him and wanted to kill him. The thing is some characters were prototypes of real people who I know. Father in this case is the prototype of the binge drinkers and alcoholics who I had the chance to meet. My father was one, throughout my childhood I have no good memory of him as a proper father except few times. Whenever he was at home he was drunk and whatever¡­ For long time I thought he was the only stereotype of an alcoholic father but I met more as I grew up. I have an employee of mine who has the exact same life. I have met many more who struggle with alcohol. It may seem cool and attractive but you can¡¯t wrestle with alcohol. It does not matter how big you are or how alcohol tolerant you are; after few more shots it will take over. I wanted to focus on an alcoholic father character to bring up the matters such as those to young people who could read the story and take initiative from this story as future fathers to be more responsible, same applies for women too. I just didn¡¯t go into the subject for god knows what reason. Just you know, some of the chapters that you have read or will read are based more or less on real life with some flavors of fiction.


    I enjoy writing and to tell the truth I didn¡¯t expect Wolf¡¯s Cry to be this popular in just 17 days. Thank you all for your kind attention!


    ***********************


    Chapter 39 ¨C Show off!


    Wyrm went out. Was he becoming attached to Luna so that he didn¡¯t want to see her hurt?


    She lay her head on my shoulder and hugged me back. I let my right hand drift to her thigh. We had a kiss but she parted her lips and began to suck my tongue. I didn¡¯t go over the board that night as my pride and dignity won¡¯t let me overtake the helplessness of a lost soul. We slept together, Luna¡¯s head on my shoulder.


    For few days after the night her eyes avoided me at all costs. She was acting insecure when we were together and blabbering nonsense. I feared the idea that she fell in love with me. The wyrm got bigger in last few weeks and was almost as tall as a horse. Everyone was in awe whenever he was around. His spiky ¡°hair¡± and massive wings were impressing everybody. I knew how big it was going to get but still couldn¡¯t find a way to kill it off without damaging the summoner and familiar bond that we three shared.


    Luna had become the Duchess of the Wallington House and was going to attend an official ceremony in the royal palace for king to approve her as his representative over the domains she held. I was waiting for it to happen with four eyes open because it was going to be the first time ever where I could meet the best magicians of the kingdom who were living, experimenting and working under king¡¯s direct mentorship in an observatory called Landgrave.


    We left to capital city of the kingdom. It was called Priss¨¦. This time Luna was always sitting in a horse-drawn carriage all the time. Coachman was driving from the box seat of the carriage. Six horses were mounted to carriage. She was sitting on the back seat of the carriage and people had a chance to view their duchess. Two cavalrymen were riding in front of the carriage while at least 16 of them behind it. Gorn was walking on the right side of the carriage while I was sitting inside on opposite direction to Luna.


    Priss¨¦ was a city of massive cosmopolitan city. Just for you to imagine what I mean by massive, Mehn City from my own world was like a one sixth of the Priss¨¦. It had a part which was restricted to royalty and nobody else were welcome there unless invited. Royal estate of the Kingdom of Marlings, the Beaumont palace was in the center of the restricted area. The palace was built almost a millennia ago, but was well preserved. It was as if time stood still in the palace. Beaumont palace was like a missing link of history between past and present. Gorn and I were staying with Luna.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    Cavalrymen and carriages were tended somewhere else. The ceremony was to be held day after our arrival and dukes, duchesses and other direct subjects of the king were arriving with us to the palace.


    Two massive doors of gold plated carvings opened. Luna entered first, Gorn and I were following behind. Male or female, everybody had their best clothing reserved for today. She was walking very slowly in a   ladylike manner. There were dukes, duchesses, high magicians, relatives of the royal family, members of the high court and so on standing on our right and left with few meters of distance. I was wearing black leather pants and nothing on top except the wolf¡¯s skin and was kind of showing off my tattoos. I had wolf¡¯s head on top of mine. Ulfberht was in his sword form. Wyrm, as always, had an indifferent attitude.


    King Bartholomew Beaumont was sitting on a throne which was 5-6 steps above the ground and his wife Queen Matilda Beaumont was sitting on another throne which was a step or two below the king¡¯s. Luna bowed but neither I nor Gorn made a move. Matilda was beautiful. Bartholomew had an aura and image of a king. He had an excellent build. He had long black and white beard which made him look different than any other man in the crowd. He had a huge husky by his side which I assumed was his familiar.


    [Bartholomew]: Luna von Raden, I have heard of your deeds.


    [Luna]: Ut sementem feceris ita metes!


    [Matilda]: Beautiful and smart.


    [Bartholomew]: Merciless.


    [Matilda]: Brave too.


    [Bartholomew]: I would have done the same, so you will not be ashamed of your past deeds and will serve the kingdom until your last breathe. I deem you worthy and appoint you as Duchess to the house of Wallington.


    She bowed and smiled.


    [Bartholomew]: You really have summoned two familiars!


    [Luna]: yes, my king.


    [Bartholomew]: I was told they can speak too!


    [Luna]: Yes, my king.


    He looked at Gorn but avoided his gaze. Humans always have self-preservation instinct and in this case it warned king not to play around with Gorn. My eyes met his.


    [Bartholomew]: You have a distinctive clothing.


    [Me]: I am a warrior.


    [Bartholomew]: A warrior, who has a dog¡¯s skin on his body.


    [Me]: It¡¯s wolf¡¯s skin.


    [Bartholomew]: Swordstorm!


    The husky stood on its four and began to walk towards me in an aggressive manner showing its teeth and growling a bit. I didn¡¯t want to hurt king¡¯s pride but he gave me no spare room to maneuver. I pushed wolf¡¯s head back to my spine and began to transform. My hair grew up to my shoulders. Swordstorm got scared, and stopped moving. I hadn¡¯t done it for a long time but I couldn¡¯t stop the urge. I howled for a minute or so. Everyone was terrified. I could feel some trembling in fear.


    [Bartholomew]: Hahaaaa. What a show off!


    Next: Chapter 40 - Desperate</a>

 Chapter 40 - Desperate

    I wasn''t able to post a chapter yesterday, as I had my share of problems IRL:)


    If you guys may share some your thoughts on characters or side stories, I would love to hear them out!


    ************************


    Chapter 40 ¨CDesperate.


    I had a wide grin on my face. Transformed back to normal human form.


    [Bartholomew]: You almost got me! Duchess von Raden, you are lucky to have warrior of this caliber and a dragon by your side.


    [Luna]: Thank you my king.


    [Bartholomew]: We will solve the monster problem for once and all. All kingdoms are preparing for a war, but this time we will be the ones attacking. In future, I¡¯ll call upon you to aid me in the conquest of Cursed Lands. Until then you are free to rule over Wallington domain.


    Bartholomew Beaumont announced the war preparation plan and conquest of cursed lands to all of his subjects.


    [Luna]: My king, I wish ask you for a favor!


    [Bartholomew]: It hasn¡¯t been ten minutes and yet you need my help¡­ (He smiled)


    [Luna]: My familiar, Aslan wishes to go back to his world and as much as I have understood from his story neither Aslan nor Gorn were dead when they were transported to void. You are personally looking after the progress in Landgrave, so can you please enlighten us in matters of magic that could him being sent back to his own world.


    [Bartholomew]: Why would you want to send him back?


    [Luna]: I do not want to force him to stay against his will.


    [Bartholomew]: You should go to Landgrave tomorrow, before departing back to Wallington house tomorrow.


    [Luna]: Thank you, my king!


    We rested in palace¡¯s guestroom reserved for Luna. The next morning after the breakfast we went o Landgrave. Observatory was inside the forest. As soon as we plunged into a thick forest, which made me forget about the mere existence of civilization - it felt so untouched and primordial. We reached observatory after twenty minutes of walk. I had heard of observatories back in my world but never been to one. I wasn¡¯t into science much. Landgrave was mostly used for scientific study of the atmosphere. They were mainly forecasting weather conditions of the continent. It was used to predict when the weather will be bad in on Cursed Lands and to calculate approximate time inhabitants of the Cursed Lands would move. What struck me was the underground base under the observatory. It seemed endless. There were lots of magicians, scientists working on different projects.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.


    We were greeted by Lin, who was a renowned magician of the Marlings Kingdom and vice-director of the Landgrave Observatory. He showed us around to introduce Luna about the Landgrave Observatory and what it was used for. Luna explained him about the conditions of our summoning and whether I would be able to travel back to my own world. I thought they would not be able to answer but Lin didn¡¯t even think about anything, replied back¡­


    [Lin]: There are two possible ways for Aslan to get back to his own world, first is for him to use the portal created by Dark Magicians of the past. The second option is standing beside you. The Dark One could do it, if he wanted.


    I turned to face Gorn. Our eyes met, and he turned his face towards Luna with a wide devilish grin on it.


    [Me]: Where is the portal?


    [Lin]: Somewhere in the Cursed Lands.


    [Me]: No exact location?


    [Lin]: No, it has not been used for millennia. The only clue what we have about portal is that its usage has been described in some books from different sources and they overlay.


    [Me]: It means, I have to look for something that may not even exist?


    [Lin]: Why don¡¯t you ask the Dark One?


    [Me]: I have different plans about him!


    I was not thinking that everything will be going smoothly, but finding a portal with a questionable existence put me in doldrums. We left observatory soon after. Luna¡¯s carriage was waiting for us at palace ready to leave. We departed royal palace and traveled back to Wallington house.


    On the way to Wallington house¡­


    [Luna]: You seem perplexed!


    [Me]: I am! Won¡¯t you? Won¡¯t you be stressed out if you were stuck in the same boat with someone who massacred your loved ones, your home and you couldn¡¯t even touch it? You killed your uncle and cousin for killing our parents. Do you think I loved my family less than you do?


    [Luna]: I didn¡¯t mean it that way! I¡¯m¡­


    [Me]: I¡¯m sorry Luna. I shouldn¡¯t have let my emotions take over me. I¡¯m sorry¡­


    My elbow joints on my knees, I had my face pressed onto my hands. I was feeling desperate.


    Next: Chapter 41 - To Sleep</a>

 Chapter 41 - To Sleep

    I''m too BUSY for the last few days, as my countries money devaluated up to 34% in a matter of 10 minutes. I''m not on the losing end though it affects my business too.


    Sorry for late chapter.


    Chapter 41 - To Sleep


    We avoided direct route to the Wallington house, instead visited as much as we could. People will get to know and appreciate their new Duchess more if Luna listened to them and solved out their problems.


    Discussions of regular paid army weren¡¯t a success yet but we had agreed with her on few fundamental points and Luna was going to address counts and earls under her rule regarding building and training army.


    I was out of place. I could not adapt. Even though there was no one who was waiting for me back in my world, I was missing it. Have you ever heard of spring rain? Rain goes on for few minutes but it pours down hard. As it stops, you step out outside and close your eyes and begin smelling earth¡¯s aroma. Smell of Marlings Kingdom didn¡¯t feel as nostalgic as back from my world.


    I had short and long term plans but I was never a dedicated person to my goals (except training), as time passed I changed. Refining my magic, war and social skills had transformed me too. My perception changed faster than I could keep up with it. Something which was an absolute truth to me when I was 17 was not so by 18 years of age.


    I will find that mythical portal because I can¡¯t have Gorn send me back. I have to avenge my family¡¯s death. God damn it, I was feeling homesick.


    On daily basis as Luna was meeting people as we went through village to village, city to city I was roaming around to get more reliable information on social and economic state of the duchy.


    People are earning from each other and there is a small amount of tax for establishing any kind of business. People are well socially protected and there are affordable prices for locals.


    Of course, it is hard to be a woman in Marlings Kingdom. Mostly, they are considered as a property of men. People are cute, sincere, shy and sweet. Theft and fraud are considered as big crimes. People mostly refrain from such things.


    Marlingsian kitchen is very sweet, fatty with lots of carbs and unhealthy. Sport is only for military and rich people. So, most sportsmen come from the military. There are amazing silk carpets, but very expensive. Most funny thing was that municipalities wrap pine trees to protect them from the cold in winters.


    We reached Wallington House sick and tired of information gathering. Overall everything was fine and Luna had to decide on her future plans by focusing on king¡¯s possible war message. In less than a week a war council was established.


    Counts and Earls had to send donations in different forms to support an army of 4000 soldiers. The soldiers are going to be paid on monthly terms. They will go through harsh trainings, which will decrease the number of casualties in times of war.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    The reality was a bit difficult in comparison to how it was planned out. Luna had to push counts and earl more than usual for the their continuous support of the plan. Everybody knew that it was done for the best of people and kingdom but human nature showed itself. I warned her that there might be one or more subjects who acted alone or in alliance with intention to throw her up.


    [Luna]: I wanted to talk to you about that.


    [Me]: About rebellion?


    [Luna]: People are well off so there can''t be a rebellion; nevertheless I want you to check Marquis Selinah Lucchi.


    [Me]: Isn¡¯t she the one who¡­


    [Luna]: Yes, she is the one who was with Count Philistos J¨¹licher who were besides me in my uncle and counsin¡¯s punishment.


    [Me]: Aren¡¯t they loyal?


    [Luna]: I keep my enemies close to me.


    She wasn¡¯t as dumb as I thought she is. Same night I left to Eikinen province to check out Marquis Selinah Lucchi. Ulfberht was in his ring form. I didn¡¯t wear wolf¡¯s skin and went with usual Marlingsian clothing. I had flip-flops instead of shoes, normal pants and long-sleeve shirts on me. I bought a horse from the closest village to travel easily and a bag full of expensive jewelry to sell in Eikinen province.


    Eikenen province was known all around the Marlings Kingdom as the best province for agriculture products. Their climate was dry and hot in summers, cool and wet in winters. The first village within Eikinen province that I visited was called Baha. Its main production was fruits of different kinds and I stayed overnight in an inn to gather information about where I should head over.


    [InnKeeper]: You do not seem to be from Marlings.


    [Me]: I¡¯m from Artarian Kingdom and travelling all around Marlings Kingdom trading jewelry.


    [InnKeeper]: You will not find any customers here.


    [Me]: I know, I was told that, the best place to sell off the rest of my jewelry is Melkin city in Eikenen province.


    [InnKeeper]: Marquis Lucchi loves balls and parties. Rich people of Eikenen love to show off their wealth while attending parties held by her. You should go there for sure!


    [Me]: How much it will cost me to stay overnight?


    [InnKeeper]: 2 silvers. Breakfast is included in the price.


    I paid for my room and went to sleep.


    Next: Chapter 42 - On House</a>

 Chapter 42 - On House

    Chapter 42 ¨C On House.


    Next morning, I packed my stuff and travelled straight to Melkin city. The roads were paved well. It didn¡¯t take long until I reached Melkin. The city had an aristocratic feel to it. Everything was expensive and to be able to stay in Melkin you have to be well off. Guards were on duty at every entrance and were logging the details of travellers into two different documents. One of them had to be on traveller at all times, and by presenting it you could take your leave from the city. As much as I understood the second document was collected by Marquis Lucchi¡¯s officials at nights and written onto ledgers throughout the night alphabetically. Those updated ledgers were given back to guards in the morning to identify the traveller. I think it was a hard job to do, and I didn¡¯t understand why they were wasting resources, especially manpower on matters such as that one. Weapons and armory were confiscated at etrance to be picked up on exitting the city.


    [Guard]: What¡¯s your name?


    [Me]: Akira. Akira Hakkinen.


    [Guard]: Spell it.


    [Me]: A-k-i-r-a  H-a-k-k-i-n-e-n.


    [Guard]: Where do you come from?


    [Me]: I¡¯m from Artarian Kingdom but I¡¯m travelling from Marlings Kingdom. I¡¯m a travelling merchant.


    [Guard]: Okay, travelling merchant. Is it your first time in Melkin?


    [Me]: Yes.


    [Guard]: Alright, this is your copy of documents, second copy is going to stay with us. You are to stay in Melkin at least for 1 day. If you want to stay for more than 15 days you should inform milice. You will be searched by another guard for weapons and arms, if you have any on you right now you shall give them to me now. If the guard finds anything on you, your travel documents will be useless and you will not be able to enter the city for another year.


    [Me]: Thank you.


    Melkin city was more marvelous than any other city which I had ever seen. It was divided into three parts. Mall was the name of the shopping district. It was like a huge market and you could find anything and everything that you could think of. Shops, blacksmiths, markets, butcheries, and so on were advertising products and services. You could get lost in here. Thousands of people were roaming around. Everything was expensive but you were paying for top quality products. The people who were working in shopping district were living in second part of the city called the Pallazo. Discrict was named after the first person who built the first inn in Melkin. Nobody owned any housing or inn in the Pallazo. Only renting options were avialable. The third and the most exclusive district was called Belgravia. It was home to Marquis Lucchi¡¯s estate. Only the original citizens of the Melkin city had their houses in there. Lands and properties in Pallazo and Mall were owned by people who lived in Belgravia. At nights parties and different kind of entertainments were held in Belgravia, or that¡¯s what I heard about from the owners of the jewelry shop where I sold my merchendise. I told them I would like to enter the Belgravia but they said me I will need special invitation from a person who lived in Belgravia district for entrance. I had around 800 gold coins with me after selling the jewelry.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    Pallazo had inns according to everyones needs and pocket. I booked a suite in Emerald Pier inn for 20 golds per night. Believe me or not, its up to you, but I had my private chef and personal fitness trainer during my stay. The suite has gold and ivory furniture. There was a library and dining room. The most important of all was the butler. His name was Raj. The guy was know it all. He could get you anywhere if you tipped him enough.


    [Me]: Raj, main reason why I choose Melkin to trade is to spend a night in any Belgravian party.


    [Raj]: It is a must for a man of worldly desires.


    [Me]: I have heard so, but I do not know how to get there. It¡¯s amusing to look but not to touch. You know what I mean Raj?


    [Raj]: I know sir. I know.


    [Me]: So?


    [Raj]: So you should by clothing first and arrange a party in here. I can help you out with that. I can help you out with sending invitation to Baron Mirun Svaldr.


    [Me]: A baron?


    [Raj]: He is a smart man. Moreover he is Marquis Lucchi¡¯s cousin and closest advisor.


    [Me]: I assume you know what you are doing.


    [Raj]: Sir, I will not let your investment to go to waste!


    [Me]: 10 golds should be enough?


    [Raj]: 20 sir. That¡¯s for invitations. The rest is on house. ;)


    Next: Chapter 43 - Mansion</a>

 Chapter 43 - Mansion

    Public Announcement for readers!


    I have found a new gem in ff scene and I would like you all to check it out - Forgotten Conqueror</a>


    I have no affiliation to the ff which I shared with you guys, and do not know the writer.. It''s just I liked it and it will suit your tastes too (I reckon).


    *********************


    Chapter 43 ¨C Mansion


    Raj referred me to Vicci¡¯s. It was the clothing shop for elite. They were sewing custom clothing and shoes for rich customers. I went ahead and ordered a costume for 40 gold coins. They were going to make me the best possible Artarian party costume in a day¡¯s time.


    I paid another 80 gold coins for extra¡¯s that Raj was going to add to freshener list. He told me there would be black caviar to be eaten with butter on bread. I nodded to him as if knowing what is was.


    I had black pants on me with white breeches up to my knees with drawn strings. Black low-heeled shoes with gold buckles were attracting attention. Yellow doublet with rounded waist and slashed sleeves gave a different aura to me. Wearing a tricorn hat was a must but I refused as it was going to be an indoor party.


    Raj had arranged a group for live music. I was welcome guests by the door. Baron Svaldr was missing and Raj told me not to worry as he will join later on.


    None of the guests belonged to Belgravia. All of them were from different parts of Marlings and Ludara kingdoms and were visiting Melkin for entertainment and holidays. Most likely they attended every party thrown in the Pallazo.


    Baron Mirun Svaldr joined party few hours before the midnight. By that time, I was drinking wine and enjoying the occasional food by joining groups of people and talking to them. People get to know me as a good storyteller. I told them no lies but truth. I told them the legend of a kid who was lost in Devil¡¯s Canyon and his travels. Fortunately, most of the guests were so into my stories that at some point I was encircled by people and they were listening to me as if hungry homeless people waiting for free food.


    [-]: What happens to hero¡¯s family?


    [Me]: Dragon kills them all.


    [-]: that¡¯s a story which I have never heard, where does it originate from?


    [Me]: On west of Artarian Kingdom within forests of Darn lives a tribe called Kali. This was their story.


    [-]: Never heard of them.


    [Me]: They do not communicate with out world a lot, I happened to save one of their kids from a wolf and they invited me to their village. I stayed there for 2 days and 1 night. I was told of that legend.


    If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    [-]: How come you were passing through Darn Forests?


    [Me]: I¡¯m a travelling merchant with a taste to buy and sell the most exclusive things that could be offered.


    The fat bastard with many questions was beginning to irritate me. I excused myself to bathroom before everyone knew that I was no merchant and had no idea about this world.


    I sensed the change in environment as I left the bathroom. There were guards by the doors. Baron Svaldr had arrived but I had no idea who he was as I couldn¡¯t find Raj to point him out. It was almost midnight and people were leaving one by one and thanking me for nice evening.


    [-]: It was a nice party, and stories such as those are well percieved in Melkin.


    [Me]: Thank you!


    [-]: In three days time there will be a Masquerade Ball held at Marquis Lucchi¡¯s mansion and I would like to invite you there. Would you mind joining me and my wife?


    [Me]: Of course, I would love to!


    [-]: By the way, I¡¯m Baron Mirun Svaldr.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Akira Hakkinen and it¡¯s an honor to meet you.


    [BaronSvaldr]: Likewise Akira! In three days time just before the sunset I¡¯ll be waiting for you at my mansion.


    [Me]: I¡¯ll be there!


    Baron Mirun Svalrd left my suite in haste. As I turned to go to eat something, I saw Raj standing in front of me with a wide grin.


    [Raj]: You are blessed sir to be invited to a party by Baron Svaldr himself.


    [Me]: I sure am.


    Next morning I went to Vicci¡¯s again to order a brand new costume for the party, this time with a tricorn hat in addition.


    I roamed around in Mall district to find a suitable mask to wear to the upcoming ball. There were so many choices that I changed my mind more than I could count. I decided on a mask with silver glitter eye accents and checkered assymetrical patterns on it. Large feathered head piece was on it. When I tried it on, it covered my face from nose up to hair.


    I had rented a beautiful white horse to ride in the evenings. I arrived at Baron¡¯s manor before the sunset. Baron and his wife were ready to depart. I left my horse in their servant¡¯s care and joined them in carriage to Marquis Lucchi¡¯s estate. I was wearing tricorne hat all the way up to Marquis Lucchi¡¯s estate though I left it in carriage and had my mask on as we entered her mansion.


    Next: Chapter 44 - Gift</a>

 Chapter 44 - Gift

    Chapter 44 ¨C Gift


    I had a distinctive walk. My right shoulder would stay a bit lower to the ground than my left one. Most of the time I use my hands instinctively during a talk, as if experssing myself much more better. In elite society, those would be identified as manners of low standing.


    I got off the carriage and walked by Baron Mirun Svaldr and his wife. She had a name which I forgot easily. Masks covering our faces, we were chatting and walking towards the main door.


    Everybody was wearing exceptional closing for the masquarede. Their sense of fashion was out of this world and expensive. Baron and his wife left me to talk to different people and I went ahead for a glass of wine. I acquired the chance of talking to many people and to my surprise most of the time talks swayed towards ¡°Marquis Lucchi¡¯s exceptional leadership¡±, ¡°Marquis Lucchi¡¯s loyalty to old duke and Duchess von Raden¡±. I understood that something was wrong but I wanted to guarantee my hyphothesis. I excused myself to balcony for fresh weather. Standing on balcony, my left arm resting on plinth¡¯s columnd, I began to concentrate my senses on heartbeats of guests. Few of them had beat rates as fast as rat¡¯s heart. I listened to their speech.


    [-]: As always, Marquis Lucchi¡¯s plan is over the top.


    [-]: I second that, I would never think about inviting the spy into the nest.


    [-]: hahaa


    [-]: That idiot really thinks that he could get into a party like this one...


    [-]: Did you see how he walks?


    [-]: That was a scene to watch.


    They were laughing. I saw Baron Mirun Svaldr closing on me with a different woman by his side. She had a glass of wine at her delicate hands. I introduced myself and she did the same.


    [Me]: I¡¯m honored. I¡¯ve heard a lot about you Marquis Lucchi.


    [Selinah]: Call me Selinah. We are in a party not in an official meeting.


    She asked me to tell a story which nobody had heard before and I recited her Kali¡¯s heroic deeds. She was consumed by the tale. I could tell that by analyzing her heartbeat, lip movements, stance. Her body language was not lying and could not decieve me. She liked them. If she was evil or had evil intentions she wouldn¡¯t be fascinated by them.


    [Selinah]: Akira, I would like to see you on my birthday party next week.


    [Me]: Unfortunately, I¡¯m leaving tomorrow.


    [Selinah]: Thank you for the stories.


    I woke up a bit late. Raj arranged my last breakfast at Emerald Pier. I walked to Melkin City gates, showed my documents and left the city for good. I had a tail for a day, but I couldn¡¯t sense anybody spying on me after that. Most probably spy had made sure that I have left Melkin city and went back to confirm the situation with his or her masters.


    I arrived at Wallington house after 2 days of riding. I talked to Luna about all what I saw and gave my advice on the matter.


    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    [Luna]: Thank you for spying on her.


    [Me]: It¡¯s all good, but why her?


    [Luna]: She is smart, but I want to know if she is loyal too.


    [Me]: You are afraid that they will fear you, don¡¯t you?


    [Luna]: Public execution of my uncle and cousin was not meant to put fear on them but to explain them how traitor¡¯s will be punished.


    [Me]: Why would anyone backstab you?


    [Luna]: Some other duke or duchess may promise them more lands and power.


    [Me]: I never had interest in politics.


    [Luna]: That¡¯s a wise political stance that you take.


    I laughed.


    [Luna]: Can you teleport to Marquis Lucchi¡¯s manor at will?


    [Me]: I think so. Why?


    [Luna]: Nothing.


    In 2 days, just before the midnight, Luna came to me with a small box in her hands.


    [Luna]: I have a favor to ask you.


    [Me]: Yes?


    [Luna]: Can you teleport to Marquis Lucchi¡¯s manor and give this box to her as a birthday present from me.


    I didn¡¯t expect that nevertheless I agreed. I took the box and closed my eyes. Concentrated myself and...


    [Me]: Inem apra!


    For a moment I felt as if I¡¯m in a blank space and the next moment when I opened my eyes, I was in balcony in Marquis Lucchi¡¯s manor. I was wearing my usual leather pants, wolf¡¯s skin on my spine, and waist up I had nothing on.


    [-]: Why are you so worried?


    [-]: I fear for my people and for my territories. I hope the familiar she had sent wouldn¡¯t mistell anything to her.


    [-]: Marquis, it¡¯s your 24th birthday. At least for today, think about yourself. You have been preoccupied with people and nobles almost all the time.


    [Selinah]: Mariah,  the nobles that I have brought together are sworn enemies who has no choice but to live together. I have to talk to Duchess von Raden personally.


    [Mariah]: Such a magnificent birthday party it was and you are still stuck in thoughts about these worthless nobles. That damned familiar of duchess, you have been like this after the moment he had left the Melkin.


    [Selinah]: You have been with me all the time and you know what I have gone through to come this close to prosperity in my dominion. I do not care about myself, what I want is peace to all the people in my territories. That was the last wish of my mother. How could I think about myself?


    I stepped into the ball room.


    [Me]: Selinah...


    The woman besides Selinah unsheathed her sword.


    [Mariah]: Who the hell are you?


    [Selinah]: Sheath your sword, Maria!


    [Me]: Selinah, this box is from Duchess Luna von Raden to you as a birthday gift.


    Next: Chapter 44.5 aka Interlude...to war...</a>

 Interlude...to war...

    I would like to know what readers think of where the story goes, please comment and let me know


    ******************


    Chapter 44.5


    Interlude¡­to war¡­


    My name is Hakim. I was born 24 years ago this day or I have been told so. We identify ourselves as dwarfs. We are short. We are smarter than the others inhabitants of the lands we inhabit. We grow crops, craft, and are able to read and write.


    The others ¨C Cyclops, centaurs, chimeras, drakons and the ruler of all Vanar co-existed together in a particular manner. Most of the time they used to hunt on animals that lived in lands and fed on them. In times of extreme cold or short of meat supply they terrorized us to get what they want on Vanar¡¯s orders.


    We were never accepted as part of the Kingdom of Nibiru. We were not a favored species in lands of Nibiru as we resembled humans more than any other race. Dwarfs were like mini humans or replicas of them. None of the races interacted with us and our¡¯s has avoided them for all of history.


    Dwarfs inhabited the lands around the massive circular metallic monument of unknown origin. Our tribe elders had told from generation to generation that we are to protect it, but why and what for was left unanswered. I may misremember the details in full but I was 16 when it was decided that I was a useless dwarf from community¡¯s point of view. The reason being I was avoiding all kinds of community driven work, because I did not agree with their ways. I will come to that later on.


    That day I was walking around the forbidden area. Monument was always of particular interest to me. Actually whatever I was told I shouldn¡¯t do I did. I was rebelling for the sake of rebelling.  I was walking very close to the bottom part of monument when the ground under my feet collapsed and I fall down. It did hurt, but thanks to the Creator of Monument, the most graceful one, it was not a deep hole. There was a metallic door that I opened out of interest. It led to a big room with full of books. For 3 years I came to that room on daily basis to study. At start it was hard for me so for the first month I classified books into categories. Most of it I didn¡¯t understand because they referred to metaphor called ¡°technology¡± that was something not of my understanding or knowledge. I learned about ways of agriculture, farming, war and magic. I was the first dwarf ever to be able to use magic.


    Once in few decades dry season fall upon our beautiful lands. All of the creatures migrated towards the lands of humans, and they clashed with them. We would not be on the frontiers of immigration wave but we wouldn¡¯t fall behind either. Survival of our race was of utmost importance, though some were left to protect the monument with enough resources to survive the dry season.


    I was 19 when I began to help my parents and close relatives to grow corp. I brought up some new ideas unknown to them and applied it. Our harvest was much more than the average dwarfen family¡¯s crop. In less than a year I was looked upon as a prodigy. Elders were so stuck on following the rules, set many millenniums ago, word-by-word that we as a race were far behind of our capabilities. I established animal farms of chicken, cows, and sheep. Our resources were more than enough to support all of inhabitants of Kingdom of Nibiru.


    Varan was of chimera origin. He was a mutated ape. His intelligence was of higher degree than centaurs and his strength was on par with Cyclops. Varan was ruling the lands of Nibiru for the last 10 years or so. On times of lack of meat and fruits in forests of Nibiru, Varan was ordering Cyclops and centaurs to pillage from our race and steal enough for them to survive.


    He hadn¡¯t ordered pillage for the last 2 years but that year wild wolves of mountains had increased in population and had hunted more than they should.


    10 Cyclops and 4 centaurs were coming towards our village. My people got scared and began to scatter. Running to hide for fear of their lives, I went against the usual dwarf attitude and challanged my fate.  Centaurs were fairly intelligent species. Its head, arms, and chest are those of a human and the rest of its body, including four legs, hindquarters, and a tail is like that of a horse. Cyclops were giants who resembled us or humans in everyway but had one eye on their forehead. They could speak but couldn¡¯t use their brains for more than that. I took a sheep with me and waited for them at village¡¯s entrance. It didn¡¯t take long and they arrived.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Hakim of dwarfs. I welcome you all to dwarfen village and would like to offer you my help.


    Giant cyclop who seemed as the leader of the cyclops party bended down and...


    [-]: Me Frojal. Me hungry.


    I let go of the sheep and Frojal let go of the baton on his right arm and grabbed sheep with his both hands. He devoured it.


    [Me]: Frojal, I¡¯m not an enemy though we are not friends either.


    [-]: Are you sucking up to us?


    [Me]: No wise centaur, I¡¯m challanging the pointless massacres that has happened until now.


    I talked to them for long. Centaur¡¯s name was Erekiel. For another year, Vanar had sent centaurs, cyclops, drakons to our village for pillaging. He didn¡¯t know that I was making friends with them and changing their ways of thought by conversating with them as they came almost every month. Tribe elders didn¡¯t favor my contact with the beasts but couldn¡¯t do anything against it as they were not pillaging anything anymore.


    As I read more, I understood more about what had happened long time ago. Humans had done something wrong, an experiment which had messed up their plans and the environment. I¡¯m not sure about the details as I do not know what they mean in the writings but an explosion had occured and it left this lands in devastating situation. Humans who were living here had died, and animals who inhabited these lands evolved what we identify today as centaurs, chimeras, cyclops, drakons.


    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    I haven¡¯t seen any document about our, dwarfs history. I came to conclusion that we are descendants of humans. I kept most of the knowledge to myself, even excluding my own race from the information at my hands.


    On dry seasons, throughout the history, whenever inhabitants of the Nibiru passed over to human lands we were welcomed with war. Human¡¯s had no place for us within their community. They have never tried to interact with us.


    Vanar had done a marvelous job by bringing the beasts of Nibiru together. Albeit he lacked something very important. He had no vision. The future was of importance to every being with self-consiousness. His kingdom had no future. The day of his death would be the end of it.


    I was sitting on top of a hill when I came up with a plan. It was an excellent one, but I have had enough conversations with beasts to sway their allegiance to me. I promised myself to conquer the world. I will be on top of the hierarchy. It was a gamble, a big one and I was going to take it.


    I talked to Frojal and Erekiel in private. I knew they were Varan¡¯s most trusted sidekicks. I told them that one day they will be asked to make choice. Both of them laughed at me and told me what I was blabbering. I didn¡¯t reply.


    Beasts had come for supplies when I brought most of the dwarfs to meet them. I had prepared myself a speech which I was going to say. I used ladder to go on top of a big rock.


    [Me]: I¡¯m Hakim. Some of you know me personally, some of you have heard of me from fellow chimeras, cyclops, centaurs, drakons and dwarfs.


    Silence fell.


    [Me]: Yesterday I got permission from the Creator of the Monument, the omnipotent one, the omnipresent one to reveal you of our future bestowed upon us by our Creator - Jahum. Few years ago I had a dream. In the dream I was ordered to go to forbidden monument and touch it. I thought it was just a dream so I didn¡¯t go, but I had the same dream everynight for a long time. I was getting worried so after few days I went to monument and stroked it.


    They were listening carefully. I waited a bit to intensify their curiousity.


    [Me]: I was enlightened. Creator himself talked to me first time. He told me that I can not reveal anything until he thought I am ready to accomplish his mission. Later on he sent down Angel Maximus to teach me the knowledge of the chosen one. That was how our resources increased in size. Yesterday Maximus told me that I¡¯m the prophet of Creator and I¡¯m ready to take on the mission.


    I raised my arms up, right palm facing the sky and left palm pointed towards ground. Silently, I chanted two spells. Fire was coming out of my right palm while water was flowing out of my left palm.


    Whispers were coming from every direction. Nobody said anything. Only whispers. I knew it was a perfect show. I went away.


    Next day, more than 10 chimeras and air drakons came to take me to Murman. It was the name of cave which was home to Frojal in the past and Vanar resided there now. I expected it. I knew that not everyone had to follow me or had to be affected by my speech or vision. There had to be someone who would betray me to Vanar. Actually, I wanted to be betrayed.


    There were cyclops, centaurs, air and ground drakons and chimeras in the cave. They were either sitting or lying on the ground while on opposite direction of the entrance Varan was sitting on a throne. I stood still. The apelike chimera was aggressively looking at me. He knew I was a challange which he had to overcome to rule.


    [Varan]: So small, but with soo big ambitions. Couldn¡¯t the Creator have found anybody else for his mission?


    [Me]: Jahum knows the best. (it was a rhetorical answer)


    I could see Varan getting agitated by my answer. I took the chance.


    [Me]: I have an order from Jahum to be done today. It¡¯s a simple choice.


    [Varan]: Tell us, enlighten us too.


    He was smiling.


    [Me]: There are too many in here.


    Varan pointed towards ten beasts.


    [Varan]: Rest of you leave!


    [Me]: Still too many, there should be you, me and the most trusted beasts to you.


    [Varan]: Alright, Little One. I¡¯ll play along. Everyone except Frojal and Erekiel shall leave.


    Varan knew that I was powerless. He was thinking about humiliating me in front of everyone. But he could kill me anytime and anywhere so he didn¡¯t care much about many seeing him to do it.


    I raised my right and pointed my index finger at Varan.


    [Me]: Jahum wishes his death to be at Frojal and Erekiel¡¯s hands.


    Varan was smiling. He thought I had gone mad. His face expressions changed from pleasure to pain when Erekiel¡¯s bow got through his neck. Frojal used his baton to smash Varan¡¯s head. Varan was part of history now. A history which I had felt no symphathy.


    [Me]: enough.


    Frojal stopped. I asked them to come with me. I talked about Jahum¡¯s mission. I had to create heaven to beasts of Nibiru. I was to be king and prophet of Jahum in Nibiru.


    Human books were right. Ignorant crowd was the easiest to rule over.


    I¡¯m 24 now. It¡¯s been 4 years that I rule over Nibiru. Abundance in harvest and animal farming had favored my rule. Beasts believed in me. Noone was left out in the last 4 years.


    I was building an army. Human books were useful. I knew what to do by heart.


    The dry seasons were coming up. This time, I¡¯ll change the history. I¡¯ll not wait for waters to perish to attack the human lands. I have decided and I¡¯ll announce my judgment tonight.


    Again I have chosed the same rock to climb. I put on the ladder and begin to climb up. I stand still.


    Silence fells again and everybody waits to hear what I say.


    [Me]: Jahum has given his permission and blessings. In two months, we are taking over human lands. We are going to war...


    Next: Chapter 45 - Wild Animals</a>

 Chapter 45 - Wild Animals

    Chapter 45 ¨C Wild Animals.


    [Selinah]: Would say my ¡°thanks¡± to her?


    I looked at the girl with armor for a moment. Our eyes met. Distrust in her eyes, Mariah had an aggressive aura around her.


    [Me]: I will! Now if you will excuse me!


    I did teleport back to Wallington House.


    [Luna]: Teleporting is useful.


    [Me]: It is. There was a girl called Mariah besides Marquis Lucchi.


    [Luna]: She is her familiar.


    [Me]: I thought I am the only human familiar?!


    [Luna]: Mariah is a shape shifter. She is a sword master.


    In the morning, a messenger from king arrived hastily. Mobilization of local forces was declared and army lead by Luna had to be ready in a week¡¯s time to join King Bartholomew near capital city to leave to Cursed Lands. Crusade was on way, and we were going to take part in it. I was more interested in it because of the portal that could take me back to my world. I had to go to Cursed Lands no matter what.


    Having a ready-to-go, trained off the shelf army was an advantage. Luna was overall leader of the army though Marquis Lucchi,  Count J¨¹licher and Count Darwin were leading three main battalions that made up the army. Nobles still were main force within the army, as they had familiars and could use magic. Army of 4000 departed to capital city on time and reached Priss¨¦ in 10 days of travel.


    There were 6 armies of total twenty five thousand camping around Priss¨¦ by the time we reached it. We met other dukes. The only one I remember is Duke Benjamin Hassan¡¯s son Rakim. He was hanging around Luna a lot. I think he had romantic interest in her but didn¡¯t get what he wanted. He was a year or two older than Luna. King Bartholomew took command of the 7 armies and we began to march towards Cursed Lands. On the third night of the march at king¡¯s headquarters¡­


    [Bartholomew]: We will be joining Artarian army and both our armies will attack from Artarian front. Kingdom of Barmin, Kingdom of Vandall and Kingdom of Jorm will invade from Jormian front.


    [Duke_Benjamin]: We should have sent spies ahead of invasion to gather information.


    [Bartholomew]: We will send a day before we reach Artarian front.


    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    [Luna]: What if monsters are¡­


    The other dukes began to laugh at her words even before she could begin whatever she was going to tell.


    [Duke_Erasmus]: No ¡°if¡±s Duchess. King¡¯s plan is flawless.


    I didn¡¯t care much about their plans but other dukes were sucking up to king in every possible way. Politicians are same everywhere. Power is sweet, once you taste it, you do not want to let go of it. Our forces joined with Artarian army and again Bartholomew took over the control of both armies. He was old but a powerful person with an intense aura surrounding him.


    Gron had grown in size. It was larger than most of the dragon¡¯s or lizard type familiars. His height was almost as big as two-story building. Luna was riding Gorn, instead of a horse. Sometimes he was flying and I could sense Luna getting pleasure from the flight. They were becoming friends.


    Mountains were like natural borders between Cursed Lands and the rest of the world. There were only two locations from where an army could pass easily to march to Cursed Lands. The first one was called Arthur¡¯s pass and was on northwest of Artarian Kingdom. The second one was named after some old-dead hero and was in southwest Jormian Kingdom.


    Army camped near Arthur¡¯s pass for 2 days as spies were sent into Cursed Lands after information. 4 spies were sent to retrieve intelligence on monsters that we were going to fight.  In the morning of 2nd day Luna was asked to join king on his headquarters. I was with her in king¡¯s tent. Rest of the dukes were there as we arrived into the tent.


    [Bartholomew]: Report!


    [Spy]: Nothing my king. Only wild animals.


    2nd spy told same things. It was as if monsters had vanished out of Cursed Lands. Everyone was curious about the situation. Nobody expected all of the monsters to be at Arthur¡¯s pass but there had to be some.


    The only thing was to wait for the other two spies to arrive. They had to be in king¡¯s presence by tonight.


    No good news arrived that night. Intel from both of the spies had same implications as the other two. No monsters were in sight but wild animals.


    Next: Chapter 46 - Into two.</a>

 Chapter 46 - Into two

    Chapter 46 ¨C Into two.


    I stepped up to talk to king. Some of the nobles had face expressions which meant they were not in favor of me or anybody else whether familiar or not to talk in front of the king but the situation was grave and king listen to me.


    [Me]: I assume inhabitants of Cursed Lands are no more scattered into races as you have known up until now. There has to be a reason for them not to be in sight. The worst case is for them to build an army...


    [Duke_Erasmus]: That¡¯s not possible. Those monster¡¯s wont....


    [Me]: Duke Erasmus if you cut off my word again I¡¯ll cut off your head!


    [King-Bartholomew]: Now, now! Continue Aslan.


    [Me]: We should leave a small force in here, and move to Jorm.


    [Duke_Benjamin]: I second that.


    [Duke_Erasmus]: Not you Benny!


    [Bartholomew]: Enough!


    [Bartholomew]: Viscount Rakim Hassan will stay in Arthur¡¯s pass with 1000 warriors and tomorrow at dawn we will be moving to Jorm. Duke Erasmus!


    [Duke_Erasmus]: Yes my lord?!


    [Bartholomew]: Send spies to gather intelligence. Duchess von Raden!


    [Luna]: Yes my lord?!


    [Bartholomew]: Use your dragon to fly to Jorm ahead of us and see what¡¯s happening over there!


    [Luna]: Understood!


    I left with Luna. Gorn could fly for days without a rest. We landed just once in two days of flight for me and Luna to sleep. On third day we reached Jormian border with Cursed Lands.


    Black smoke had covered the skies. The war was at its peak. Gorn was attacked with magic and bows because they thought it was a drakon from Cursed Lands. It landed besides the tent that was on top of hill looking towards the battle zone. Firstly, I jumped down and few warriors began to charge at me. I told them who I am and they calmed down. King Daniel the Brute of Kingdom of Jorm invited Luna and me into the tent.


    [Luna]: What has happened?


    [Daniel]: I¡¯m too exhausted. Queen Xristiana will fill you up on details. When the back up is going to arrive?


    [Luna]: Few weeks. A month. Maybe more!?


    [Xristiana]: Are you Duchess von Raden?


    [Luna]: Yes, please call me Luna.


    [Xristiana]: Luna, around 10 days ago we were going to cross to Cursed Lands. A Centaur came out of the pass with white flag on his hands. He identified himself as Erekiel and asked us to surrender to King Hakim, the prophet and messenger of Lord Jahum. In case of resistance, Erekiel told that war will be ineviatable.


    This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    [Me]: Who is Jahum? Why a king is under control of some lord?


    [Xristiana]: Lord as in God. We have no idea whoever or whatever this Hakim is. It is that he is claiming to be given a divine mission by the creator. All of the monsters in Cursed Lands have sweared oath to Hakim and pledged themselves to accomplish whatever the mission is.


    [Luna]: Still, it does not justify this situation!


    [Xristiana]: It does. Not in sense that any otherworldy being such as God is helping him. The problem is Hakim has mastered art of war. Monsters are attacking according to a war plan. It is not like back in old times when they would just attack in dispersed formations.


    [Luna]: Where¡¯s King Jeremy of Barmin Kingdom?


    [Xristiana]: He betrayed us and changed his sides to help Hakim.


    Hakim was going to be a difficult opponent to overcome but not the impossible one. I went outside, and told Gorn to take me to battlefield. Luna came out of tent, but was a bit late as I was on Gorn and we were already on air.


    Armies of Barmin, Vandall and Jorm need to have a push in their low morale. I was going to perform the miracle that they needed. More than 20 cyclops and around 15 air and land drakons were coming towards our armies for the next wave of attack. Centaurs were backing them up by  firing arrows on top of them towards us.


    [Me]: Gorn you should take the lizards and I will kill the cyclops. Whoever finishs job first, helps out the second one.


    [Gorn]: I¡¯ll kill everyone!


    I jumped from Gorn¡¯s neck on to a cyclop. I have to admit they were tall and big giants. Most of them were armed with massive batons. Ulfberht had materialized into his sword form. I was on air descending down onto a cyclops head. Everything happened in a blink of an eye. Ulfberht¡¯s tip was facing ground and I had both of my hands on his hilt. I stabbed Ulfberht as hard as possible into cyclops head and slashed down. His face was cut into two.


    Next: Chapter 47 - Yesterday?</a>

 Chapter 47 - Yesterday?

    Chapter 47 ¨C Yesterday?


    Blood gushed out. I was covered in it. Cyclops¡¯ body began to fall down to ground lifeless. I took out Ulfberht and jumped up onto the back part of dead cyclops¡¯ shoulder. I looked at my left side, and saw Gorn¡¯s mouth crushing another lizardlike creature¡¯s head.


    I felt a breeze from right side, and bended my knees to avoid the baton strike by another Cyclops aimed at me. I put force on my legs and sprang towards another Cyclops. I slashed Cyclops with Ulfberht but what got my interest was that it didn¡¯t cut through Cyclops body into two but made normal cut. Their skin was hard enough to trouble a sword such as Ulfberht. I jumped down to earth and felt another breeze. I avoided baton strike by jumping forward and the bat hit another Cyclops.


    Analyzing the situation, I came up with few theories on spot in a short moment. Firstly, Cyclopses were much more powerful than most of the creatures I have met up until now except Gorn. Secondly, I killed the first Cyclops by striking its head, which meant that they were most vulnerable from their heads ¨C I think I smashed Ulfberht to its eye. Third and the most important was that I was at an advantage, as they were massive in comparison to me and I had convenience of speed and small size around many cyclopses who had their eyes on me.


    I felt another breeze coming up from sky downwards; shadow of baton was approaching fast on me too. I made a somersault to my right and jumped back onto cyclops¡¯ baton. I began to run upwards the baton to its arms and slashed my sword as hard as I could through the cyclops¡¯ neck. Blood came out but it didn¡¯t have the effect of the first strike that killed the last Cyclops. It felt like a deep scratch.


    Another strike was coming onto me, and I teleported back to ground. I saw a massive baton striking to the shoulder of the Cyclops where I was standing a moment ago. I bounced away as I saw foot of striking Cyclops almost crushing me. It had hit my previous location in precise attack but unfortunate to him I was not there anymore and it had crashed its comrade¡¯s shoulder.


    Sound blasted from enemy front. Sound of the trumpet, maybe it was coming from a horn. Cyclopses began to go back to their forces as if nothing has happened. Lizards that felt like dragons without wings withdrew from battlefield too. Gorn was going to go after them but I called to him and we went back.


    Gorn could be categorized as soulless and impatient bastard but no fool. He knew that going after them was not a wise idea. I killed two cyclopses. One was easy kill because of the strike directly to its eye, though second one was still moving its arms and legs as if giving its last breath.


    Soldiers had seen our fight and were shouting in our favor. We had accomplished what I had in my mind but right now I knew why there were only human corpses on the battlefield. We were no match to them in a proper fight. At least human forces were not ready to fight them head on and were taken in surprise when monsters attacked them using war tactics rather than barging indifferently.


    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    [Luna]: What the hell do you think you are doing?


    [Me]: Testing enemy forces.


    [Luna]: Do not test my patience!


    [Me]: Calm down.


    [Luna]: You know, I was worried! You both could get killed. Do not¡­


    [Me]: Luna wake up. We are in the middle of war and unfortunately we are on the losing side. Unless we change the tide of war.


    Queen Xristiana¡¯s eyes were looking at us in awe. Gorn and I had done something, which they couldn¡¯t accomplish in last few weeks.


    [Me]: Queen Xristiana, would you tell us what had happened? In details, from the first moment when you came in contact with army of monsters.


    [Xristiana]: Y¡­Yes¡­Let¡¯s go to tent.


    Whoever was leading the army of Cursed Lands was bright. He could but didn¡¯t kill army of three kingdoms in one go. Instead he was sending small forces of cyclopses, drakons (Xristiana told me that they were not lizards but draKons) and centaurs to attack and kill as many as possible and retreat later. He was demoralizing our forces. Was he thinking to inject fear and despair into human minds? The feeling of helplessness?


    That night I slept well. I had to rest, as there was a possibility that enemy will strike in full force tomorrow or any other moment.


    In the afternoon, another centaur with a white flag came half the way into the battle field and began to wave the flag. We decided that Queen Xristiana and I were going to go to meet the centaur. Xristiana had hope in her eyes, and I think we were the reason. We walked for 25-30 minutes with slow steps and reach the centaur.


    [-]: I¡¯m Erekiel. Hakim¡¯s messenger.


    [Xristiana]: I¡¯m Queen Xristiana of Jorm.


    [Me]: Aslan of Kali tribe.


    [Erekiel]: Our beloved prophet had a revelation yesterday night. Johum had shown him the kingdom where centaurs, humans, drakons and cyclopses live side by side¡­


    [Xristiana]: He had meant, whatever left of humans¡­


    [Erekiel]: Prophet Hakim told that¡¯s the choice upon the leaders of humans to make. Jeremy made his choice; it is your turns now.


    [Me]: What else Hakim says?


    [Erekiel]: Prophet says that by Johum¡¯s will the victory is with us!


    [Me]: Did he predict death of cyclopses from yesterday?


    Next: Chapter 48 - Eyes</a>

 Chapter 48 - Eyes

    Rate, review & comment!


    ******************


    Chapter 48 ¨C Eyes!


    Erekiel was not getting emotional at all, they really believed in Hakim. There were two options left. Either to surrender or to kill Hakim. Winning the war against Hakim¡¯s army was almost impossible, as we were lacking strong warriors and mages who could fight head to head with cyclopses.


    [Erekiel]: Stop provoking me, its useless.


    [Me]: I would like to meet Hakim, vis-¨¤-vis.


    [Erekiel]: Our prophet meets only the believers of Jahum.


    Mana engulfed my body and blowed out of it creating waves of wind in all directions. I began to transform into werewolf. This time I was going for full transformation. It was painful. Insanity was driving me crazy. Lust to kill, there was a craving for blood and meat. Xristiana and Erekiel backed up, seeing me transform.


    The funny part of transformation was to walk or stand on four rather than two. It was weird as hands were altered to paws and after transformation it felt unnatural when I thought about what had happened. I had to let go of my humanlike thoughts and my wolf body would act automatically accordingly as if I was born as a wolf.


    In wolf form, I was as tall as a centaur. Erekiel was intimidated by my new appearance, I could sense it. He knew that he faced not a human but a top predator which he should be scared of.


    [Erekiel]: Demon! Hakim told us of demons and devils!


    [Me]: Tell him, I want to talk to him if he wants peace rather than war.


    That was the last thing which I told him before I turned my head upwards to the sky and began to howl. It felt so natural and peaceful as if I was sending stress out of my body. Howling lasted another few minutes and after it I changed back to human form.


    [Me]: Xristiana, there is nothing left to talk unless Hakim meets me face to face. Let¡¯s go!


    She was impressed and terrified by my mutation. I knew she wanted to talk to me but couldn¡¯t come up to say a word as we were walking back to camp.


    I could see and sense gazes on me, strange eyes. Werewolf transformation had a reverse effect on my allies. I didn¡¯t care about their well-being that much as my original plan was to get to portal and make sure that it is usable. Accomplishment of the task required sacrificies and some of them would be dead by the time I reach the portal.


    We joined rest of the commanding officers in headquarters tent.


    [Luna]: You told me you are a human!


    [Me]: I am.


    [Daniel]: Were we hallucinating? (he had a sarcastic tone)


    [Me]: No, but I possess powers that no human has.


    [Daniel]: A monster is a monster!


    [Me]: If me being a human is going to divide all of us into factions, then think of me as a FAMILILAR of Luna. A summoning. Nothing more, nothing less!


    The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.


    [Daniel]: How we know that you won¡¯t betray us?


    [Me]: Because, if I wanted you dead, you wouldn¡¯t be speaking to me now!


    They were kings, queens, dukes, duchesses, counts, earls, viscounts and so on. They were of noble birth. They were what you would call elite, best of best. But they got their titles and lands by birth not by right. Only Bartholomew had been in a war against creatures of Cursed Lands. All of the people who were standing in front of me were newbies to real war conditions. It would be much more easier if Bartholomew was here.


    Situation was tense as is, my talk had negative effect on all of them, so I thought I had to ease a bit.


    [Me]: I¡¯m not threatening anyone. I¡¯m stating facts. I¡¯m on your side. I¡¯m with Duchess von Raden. Now, we can talk about what are we going to do against Hakim¡¯s army or we may begin to mourn soldiers, warriors and mages who will die tomorrow.


    [Xristiana]: Any plans?


    Hakim¡¯s POV


    I wanted to be finish conquering human lands without any casualties but it seems the air drakon and two humans who were on it are going to be a problem to me. Whoever he is, he killed two cyclops very easily. I have to recalculate everything to include him and the air drakon. Third one, was not present in battle. He or she, has to be strong enough not to make a move and have sent these two to fight. Maybe that one is useless at all. I have to wait for Erekiel.


    [Frojal]: O beloved one, Erekiel is here to report.


    [Hakim]: Let him come!


    Erekiel comes into the tent set especially for me.


    [Erekiel]: Messenger of Jahum, devils and demons what you were talking about were real!


    [Hakim]: Jahum knows best, He who has created everything had given me the message to relay to you. No lie or fault can be found in that message. Its perfect!


    [Erekiel]: YES! I saw the demon with my eyes. Human turned into a vicious wolf.


    [Hakim]: Were you scared of it?


    [Erekiel]: yes.


    [Hakim]: Come to me. Creation of Jahum come to me!


    With slow steps, Erekiel came close to the throne I was sitting on. His front legs bended and he bowed. I stood up and put my right hand on his head!


    [Hakim]: Repent! Without Jahum¡¯s will, that demon would not be there. If he is, it means he is a test from Jahum to us. You should fear the Creator not the creation! You should welcome anything that Jahum tests us with! Repent for your sins Erekiel!


    Tears came out of centaurs eyes!


    Next: Chapter 49 - Maybe!</a>

 Chapter 49 - Maybe!

    Rate, review & comment!


    ********************


    Chapter 49 ¨C Maybe!


    [Hakim]: Erekiel, your tears are atonement for your sins as much as they come from your heart.


    [Erekiel]: I ask for your forgiveness, prophet Hakim!


    [Hakim]: I am but a messenger, Jahum is the one who will forgive if you ask for it.


    Hakim was astonished at how creatures have taken into their hearts all the bullshit what he was throwing at them. Books of religion and philosophy, which Hakim had read in the underground library near the monument was useful. There were long lost tales and information about how the world and living beings could have been created or come into existence. Jah was the name of god or higher existence from a religion or movement called Rastafari. Hakim has added ¡°um¡± part to the original and has made up a new name for the new god who will rule the new world.


    [Hakim]: What was the demon like?


    [Erekiel]: Initially, it had human appearance. It changed its form into wolf¡¯s in front of my eyes. Wolf was as tall as me. It talked to me in that form. I could sense bloodlust from it.


    [Hakim]: A transformation. Interesting, continue Erekiel.


    [Erekiel]: He told me that he wants to meet you.


    Hakim bended his body forward, placing his left arm onto his left leg. Thumb under his chin, index finger of left hand facing sky while resting besides his left eye, Hakim began to think about the situation.


    [Frojal]: Any orders?


    [Hakim]: Everyone should rest! Jahum will show me the way in my dreams.


    Hakim was planning flawless victory. There had to be casualties but he had to make sure that his rule until his death shouldn¡¯t be questioned. Hakim was lost in thoughts. Calculating every single step as if playing game of chess. Possibilities and different situations had to be figured out and estimated to be ready in case of emergency. Hours passed and it was time to go to bed. Closing his eyes, Hakim lay on the bed. Being a king has its own advantages he mused to himself. His mind and body were tired of daily activities and bed time was the best time. He relaxed his body and began to sleep.


    [-]: Hey...


    [-]: Hello...


    Hakim heard the voice calling out to him. He fabricated his dreams and Jahum¡¯s messages. ¡°Am I actually being talked to by God?¡± reflected while in sleep.


    [-]: Hey!!!


    Hakim didn¡¯t know how to answer to the voice. Deep in sleep, he began to feel his body vibrating.


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.[-]: Wake up!


    [Hakim]: Argh... Argh...


    A human hand was covering Hakim¡¯s mouth, while another hand was firmly grabbing his right arm. He couldn¡¯t move. The one who caught him was overpowering Hakim.


    Aslan¡¯s POV


    It was hard to get into the tent undetected. There is a small man sleeping on the bed. Guards protecting the tent and its surroundings meant that he is someone important. I am not sure whether he is Hakim or not so I took the chance...


    [Me]: Hey!!!


    He was in deep sleep!


    [Me]: Wake up!


    I began to push his body to wake him up. He woke up and I covered his mouth with my right hand and grabbed on his right arm to disable his movement.


    [Me]: Do not worry, I am not going to kill you!


    His eyes were inspecting me diligently. I think he was stuck in between to believe me or not.


    [Me]: I want to talk! Are you Hakim?


    He nodded by closing and opening his eyes. He was not lying, I could tell from his heartbeat. Actually, this small man was more fit to be a king than most of the people I have met until now. He didn¡¯t lose his composure even though I could kill him by just snapping his head.


    [Hakim]: I am Hakim. Who are you?


    [Me]: I¡¯m Aslan from Kali tribe.


    [Hakim]: Never heard of them.


    [Me]: I was summoned to this world.


    [Hakim]: Are you the one who could transform to wolf?


    [Me]: Yes.


    [Hakim]: What are you here for if not killing me?


    [Me]: Killing you would be pointless as these creatures will attack us endlessly until either side disappears.


    [Hakim]: Rational thinking. I like that!


    [Me]: I won¡¯t let you kill off our side slowly as well. It¡¯s going to be full attack, either us or you!


    [Hakim]: Are you here to tell me that?


    [Me]: No, I¡¯m here to ask you to meet King Bartholomew to talk peace with him and future of this world and its inhabitants.


    [Hakim]: What¡¯s in it for you?


    [Me]: There is a portal in Cursed Lands that could send me to my world. I¡¯m searching for that.


    [Hakim]: What is a portal?


    [Me]: It¡¯s a tool of a kind which can transport me back my world.


    [Hakim]: The Monument!?


    [Me]: What monument?


    [Hakim]: Nothing, arrange a meeting with Batholomew, and I may help you out personally.


    [Me]: You know about the portal?


    [Hakim]: Maybe!


    Next: Chapter 50 - Misery...</a>

 Chapter 50 - Misery...

    Rate, review & comment!


    *********************


    Chapter 50 ¨C Misery...


    Teleporting back to headquarters, I talked with Luna, Queen Xristiana and King Daniel regarding my talk with Hakim. All of them were intrigued about how I managed to do it, mostly thinking that I will betray them at some point but nevertheless I stood firm without giving them an explicit reason to continue the battle.


    Reality was that even if King Bartholomew joined the rest of the forces, human side would never be able to win over creatures. They were more powerful in strength, resistant to magic up to some point, and the most important of all was that they were under one rule and co-operating with each other. Everybody did understand it, but either ignorance or pride was not letting them swallow the idea of possible defeat.


    I argued that they shouldn¡¯t attack until Bartholomew arrived. We would have a round table regarding truce after Bartholomew¡¯s arrival and flow of negotiations would be left to future deals.


    As time passed, more and more nobles joined my side. Actually it was more like Duchess Luna von Raden¡¯s side. Everyone thought that Luna was the one orchestrating everything behind the curtains and I was the main puppet on the stage following her each and every order. By the way, during this time Gorn has grown into an exceptional size. He was flying over to Cursed Lands, eating and crushing wild animals. Gorn was bigger than an average hill.


    Luna was a smart girl. She would grow into a great woman. Nobles were siding with her, because most of the people knew that she had a role in stopping the possible massacre of humans by creatures of Cursed Lands without shedding a drop of human blood. This meant that she was the most notorious candidate to King Bartholomew¡¯s throne as he had no kids to continue to rule after him.


    It took a bit more than a month for Bartholomew to arrive with army. A new giant tent was constructed for him to stay and King Daniel followed by Queen Xristiana were invited into initial talks. Magic barrier was cast onto the tent as a result I couldn¡¯t listen to details of the speech. It took few hours for the rest of the nobles to enter the tent. Nobody had raised any issue and Luna took the initiative...


    [Luna]: Few months ago, we were thinking about conquering the Cursed Lands but as of now we are the ones being conquered. Their army has played around with human forces as if a kid playing with toys. Moreover a king has changed to their side. We are in a dire situation!


    [Daniel]: We know that!


    [Luna]: The question is: should we continue on fighting against an enemy who will massacre us?


    [Daniel]: It¡¯s better to live a day in freedom rather than to live 40 years as a slave!


    I hated rhetorics but I didn¡¯t want to butt in. It was Luna¡¯s chance and if she was smart enough...


    [Luna]: Not as slaves but as equals!


    [Daniel]: Another kingdom?


    [Luna]: Why not? Isn¡¯t it best for future generations to live in peace in a world with just ONE more kingdom?


    [Daniel]: We are talking about monsters!


    [Luna]: King Daniel nobody is asking you take a cyclops as a wife! (loud laughs was everywhere) Intelligence wise, they are no less capable than any human.


    [Bartholomew]: Enough!


    [Bartholomew]: Arrange a meeting with Hakim. Me, Queen Xristiana, King Daniel, King Alexander of Artarian Kingdom, Duchess Luna and her familiar Aslan will be attending it.


    King Bartholomew Beaumont decision was accepted with claps. Life is a precious thing and nobody wants to die if they can prolong it. Fortunately for me I was in spotlight, and was not going to miss the negotiations although I will have limited influence in them.


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    Everyone agreed on that the first and foremost point to be taken into account is making peace. From human perspective, Hakim alone couldn¡¯t stand for whole Cursed Land inhabitants unless there is he is head of state and makes agreement in name of whole nation. The second problem was that even if they build a kingdom in Cursed Lands, every few decades they will still face dry seasons and will have to move to the rest of the world to survive. King Bartholomew, Queen Xristiana, King Daniel and King Alexander had to agree on cutting some lands of their kingdom¡¯s to be given to newly build kingdom if the negotiations went smooth.


    In the middle of battle zone a tent was build to accommodate attendee¡¯s of the peace talks. Everything in it was simple, and there was a servant from human side to provide drinks during the conversations. Everyone was shocked seeing Hakim¡¯s size. A small man with big ambitions deciding the new borders of the world was a sight to see. Erekiel and Hakim were the only attendee¡¯s from the other side.


    [Hakim]: Thank you for rationally thinking over the situation and coming together to talk about peace!


    [Xristiana]: Thank you for being here!


    Introductions were made, and everybody knew who they were facing. Top tier of the world was sitting around table to discuss the future of world.


    [Alexander]: We should define what we mean by ¡°peace¡± first?!


    Discussions went on for 8 hours a day for the two weeks. Debates on issues as territory boundaries, citizenship(Hakim brought up new law terms which were alien to many), free customs, tax and so on were discussed during two weeks. The end result was that 5 kingdom would trade in territories between each other to give to Jormian and Artarian Kingdom¡¯s so that Kingdom of Jahum could be created not just in Cursed Lands but could have lands in mainland too. Ex monarch of Kingdom of Jorm was protected by Hakim when King Daniel wanted him to be hanged for treason.


    There were many differences but I think over time they could overcome them and maybe join into a single kingdom or divide into many and wars in between races and kingdom¡¯s begin. For some it was end of trials and tribulations but in my thinking everything was beginning as of now. Hakim was planning to increase followers of Church of Jahum by making sure that humans could join it too.


    At the end of two weeks, when drafts of many were brought up to one proper agreement were signed, I took my issue to Luna and we went to talk to Hakim.


    [Me]: Hakim, you told me that you know about portal.


    [Hakim]: I may! I said I ¡°may¡±!


    [Me]: Let¡¯s get to it then...


    [Hakim]: I will be in tight schedule for the next one year, after that we can talk about it.


    I let out my mana to crawl the ground...


    [Me]: I do not have that much time!


    Erekiel came towards us. Hakim raised his left arm as if telling Erekiel to stop without talking.


    [Hakim]: It¡¯s in my interests... (He stopped)


    [Hakim]: We should leave now to the monument!


    I turned my face to Luna...


    [Me]: Would you accompany me to portal? I am not sure if it¡¯s the portal yet, but it seems that Hakim is the best choice what I have for now.


    I gazed at her as if my words had not registered, as if she was caught up in her own misery...


    Next: Chapter 51 - To Bed...</a>

 Chapter 51 - To Bed...

    Rate, review & comment!


    ********************


    Chapter 51 ¨C To Bed...


    Humans called Cursed Lands but inhabitants of those lands had a name for it. Nibiru. Hakim lead us to homeland of dwarfs. Pass which connected Nibiru and Jorm was filled with endless forests. Luna advised us to fly on Gorn rather than to walk or ride horse until we reached Hakim¡¯s home. Gorn was useful in sense flying on him made our trip much more easier and faster. Time was of importance to me. Hakim told us of a monument which was built close to his village. He told us that if there is anything that may be used as a portal to another dimension that would be monument. Hakim lacked knowledge in monument¡¯s origin, but he told us he knew where we can learn about how to activate and use it properly.


    Hakim was an interesting and mysterious persona. Small and weak in statute but passionate and ambitious one. Clothing that he wore were of normal quality as if he was not King of Nibiru. Simplicity was his lifestyle. At least that¡¯s what he told us.


    Gorn was landing for few hours a day for us to rest. We arrived to Hakim¡¯s village after 5 days of flying. Without losing time, Hakim took us to top of the hill and with his right hand pointing to north he showed us the monument. It was a large circular structure. We came close to it to get to know what it is in details. Structure was made of metal of unknown origin. It felt like iron when touching it by hand but there was no sign of corrosion or rust. It was a meter in width. In close inspection it had different circular objects drawn on its sides.


    [Hakim]: I¡¯m not sure whether it¡¯s the thing what you are searching for but there is nothing else that may be of use except this in Nibiru.


    [Luna]: How we use it?


    [Hakim]: Let¡¯s go back to my home. You all should rest, and I will search for any books that may have instructions to activate it.


    Hakim was right. I was feeling dizzy and stresful. Going back to his house, we had rice with beef. Slept through the night. At breakfast, Hakim showed up with 3 books. I tried my best but couldn¡¯t read a word from any of them. Luna and Hakim went through the books word by word for another week. By this time, most of the dwarfs were back in the village. It was a lively place to be.


    I think Kingdom of Nibiru would integrate with the rest of the kingdoms as time passed. Peace is good. Peace is the best way. I was vary of Hakim. He may be the emperor who would rule the world in the future. Time will show, and I hope I would not see what happens as I want to go back to my world.


    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    [Luna]: This a good and bad news. Which one first?


    [Me]: Good one. ?


    [Luna]: This is the dimensional portal. Hakim you go on with the bad one.


    [Hakim]: It¡¯s not fair Luna.


    Damn. He was manipulating her, they were already on name basis.


    [Hakim]: To activate it, we need something called ¡°energy¡±. Massive amounts of it. Person or group who will be going through the gate will have to ¡°insert¡± the place where they want to be transported by thinking about it. Second part is the easy part, as you know where you want to go. But ¡°energy¡± part seems hard!


    [Me]: What¡¯s energy? Is it mana?


    [Hakim]: I¡¯m not sure of details but as much as we understood lighting should be sufficent. Not just a lightening but one with extreme power in it.


    I turned my face to Luna.


    [Me]: You are able to do lightening magic, aren¡¯t you?


    [Luna]: I¡¯m but I haven¡¯t heard of anyone in this world who has mana capacity to run a multi-dimensional portal.


    [Me]: I know one.


    [Hakim]: who?


    [Me]: Luna! You have a link to me. You could borrow my mana to activate it!


    She had a smile on her face. A sad one. That¡¯s day we didn¡¯t do much, and waited for next day morning to begin our test. Before sleep I asked Luna out to hill...


    [Me]: Something wrong with you?


    [Luna]: I do not...


    [Me]: What? What¡¯s wrong?


    [Luna]: I¡¯ll be lonely if you go.


    [Me]: Gorn will be here for you!


    [Luna]: Aslan...


    [Me]: Yes?


    [Luna]: I think I love you!


    [Me]: Hahaa...


    I put my right arm around her shoulder and pull her towards myself. Her head was resting on my chest. Tears were dropping to my lap. Moon was lightening darkness of the night.


    Her hands grabbing me tighthly, she embraced me softly, as lover would. I patted her head, my fingers going through her soft hair. Few hours passed and she was asleep in my arms. I took her back to bed.


    Next: Chapter 52 - 1510</a>

 Chapter 52 - 1510

    Rate, review & comment!


    *****************


    Chapter 52 ¨C 1510


    [Me]: Close your eyes, let go of yourself and imagine the link in between us.


    [Hakim]: What the hell?


    [Me]: Sshh.. Be quite! Let her concentrate...


    In the morning we left to portal. It felt like a show. Luna, me and Hakim were standing on the center while Gorn and rest of the dwarfs were standing in circle around us in observation.


    It felt like a needle stabbing my finger. I knew that my mana was being sucked out of me though if I wanted I could stop it. Luna¡¯s aura had changed. Hakim was aware of it too. He backed away a step or two to put distance between himself and Luna.


    Luna took out her wand and chanted the spell. Sparks appeared out of wand¡¯s tip. For a moment I lost my will thinking bonding me and her didn¡¯t work out as planned. I put my hands on my face in confusion and heard the sound of lightening.


    It was unbelievable. Lightening was coming out of wand¡¯s tip and hitting the portal on its side. Nothing was happening but Hakim insisted on waiting for another few minutes. In the middle of portal a liquid began to appear and enlarge. In less than few minutes it covered inside of the circular portal. It was not water but looked like it. I came close to portal. I felt a hand grabbing me from behind.


    [Hakim]: Take it... and good luck!


    It was a lump of gold size of a small rock. I put it inside me pocket. Turned back to face the portal. To tell the truth I was scared. I didn¡¯t know what was waiting me but still imagined that I¡¯m back in my world. Thinking about Mehn city, my village, Mariette, my mother, Alva .... closed my eyes and jumped to portal.


    I felt nothing at first. Opened my eyes to see what was going on. It was like I was falling through a tube. I could see stars far away and I was travelling without moving. I couldn¡¯t sense, feel or touch anything. I don¡¯t know even if time was passing as everything went on. Idea of time and location was not present where I was.


    Noises of crackling, rustling and swishs almost exploded in my ears. Startled I put my hands on my ears and pushed my palms as hard as I could to stop the voices. Pain was unbearable, and my eyes closed I was screaming the hell out.


    I felt light covering me in an instant and I felt peace. Opened my eyes and took my hands from my ears. I felt gravitation and boom...It was like something took me with its hands and punched me to the ground. Out of instincts I closed my eyes again.


    [Me]: Damn... Did I break my nose?


    Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!Whispering to myself, I used my right hand to check out my face while pressing on my left forearm. The bell ringed. I opened my eyes to see the solid ground I was lying on. My hands on ground pushing my body first, I used my legs to stand up. I was inside a forest.


    [Me]: Did I make it back?


    I checked my right hand, Ulfberht was in his ring form.


    [Me]: Ulfberht did we make it back?


    [Ulfberht]: I am not a navigator. Get the hell out of this place and we will now!


    [Me]: What¡¯s with the attitude?


    [Ulfberht]: I¡¯m going to throw up now...


    Sometimes he was unbearable. Nevertheless he was a good companion. I didn¡¯t know where to go, so I began to walk straight.


    It took less than an hour to go out of the forest. Actually, I was not out of forest yet, but found a path. It was a well paved road.


    [Me]: They have built everything back to its original condition... (thinking to my self)


    I walked on the road. In less than 20 minutes a caravan passed me and I stopped them to talk.


    [Me]: Hi. My name is Aslan. I¡¯m of Kali tribe.


    [-]: I¡¯m Jafar. Owner of this caravan. How may I help you warrior?


    He recognized my tribe. I was really back in my world.


    [Me]: Would you mind if I get on in one of the carriages? I¡¯m tired after walking for long time.


    [Jafar]: Join me! Hop on!


    I grabbed his hand, got on the carriage and sat beside Jafar. Sometime later I asked him if it was alright if I slept on top of the goods he was carrying and he nodded in aggreement.


    I woke up when I felt a hand on my left arm. Opened my eyes.


    [Jafar]: You have slept for more than a day. Must be very tired ha?


    [Me]: Yes!


    [Jafar]: Come on, let¡¯s eat.


    Mercenaries protecting the caravan, traders, merchants, travelers ¨C all of them had come together to eat. I joined them for meal but stayed away from talking to them. It was afternoon I assume when we left to our destination.


    I didn¡¯t want to tell them what has happened to me as nobody would believe. Few hours later we reached our destination. The city seemed familiar to me. Actually everything was too lively to fit what I saw last time when I left my world.


    [Me]: Which city is it?


    [Jafar]: City of Ark!


    [Me]: Wait a minute... What year is it?


    [Jafar]: It¡¯s 1510.


    I was in shock! I didn¡¯t know what to do!


    [Jafar]: You seem like, you have sleeped for ages!? Are you an immortal who woke up after a long sleep? Hahahaaa


    I whispered.


    [Me]: 1510.


    Next: Chapter 53 - Halim''s attendant...</a>

 Chapter 53 - Halims attendant...

    Rate, review and comment!


    *******************************


    Chapter 53 ¨C Halim¡¯s attendant...


    I left the caravan at the entrance of Ark city. Didn¡¯t know what to do. I roam around Ark aimlessly for a while. While walking I passed by a goldsmith, where I traded lump gold given to me by Hakim for gold and silver coins. I did remember being in Ark before but couldn¡¯t remember in which inn I had stayed, though it didn¡¯t take long to find ¡°Albert¡¯s Inn¡± as it was the most popular one in the city because of its service and cleanliness. I payed for fortnightly accomodation and began to think about what I was going to do.


    Up to night time I was drinking in different coffee and tea houses around the city. These were the places where old people came to drink tea and coffe, play backgammon and talk about stuff from different range of topics. Politics and state of war were always part of heated discussions. By listening to them, I learned that a party has been sent to meet Demon Lord more than a month ago and they should be back by now to report to King Halim.


    I checked port for arrival and departure of balloon ships regularly to know if young me has come to city yet. There were many options and possibilities that could arise with time travelling. But before doing anything, I had to know whether I exist in this world. There was a chance that I was not back in my original world at all.


    I bought fake beard for 3 silver coins. It was expensive because of its quality and special glue given with it. Ordered a dark green colored robe with a hoodie and packed it with beard in my room for use when the time comes. Regularly checking the air port, I found what I was searching for in a week¡¯s time. Red, green, and white colored balloon landed few hours before the sunset. Using a binocular I check the passanger¡¯s getting of the balloon and 17 year old me was there.


    I have travelled back in time.


    [Me]: Should I kill him?


    My brain was working non-stop coming up with lots of ideas. At this point...


    [Ulfberht]: If you kill him you will die too, don¡¯t you?


    [Me]: Am I?


    [Ulfberht]: Yes, and most probably there will be chaos as I exist in this dimension and there is another me who is with young you right now.


    [Me]: Do you expect me to wait for another 3-4 years?


    [Ulfberht]: It¡¯s not an expectation, it¡¯s how things are going to happen. You have to be cool-headed and temperate for next 4 years.


    [Me]: Temperate? 4 years?


    [Ulfberht]: It does not mean, you have to sit in a cave and meditate until time comes. You should prepare!


    [Me]: For what?


    [Ulfberht]: To save your village, family, tribe and kingdom!


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    [Me]: Ulfberht, I¡¯m lost...


    [Ulfberht]: Get back to inn in advance and get ready.


    [Me]: Ready for what? Explain.


    [Ulfberht]: There is going to be an assassination attempt and the main guy who hires the mercenaries runs away. Don¡¯t you remember?


    [Me]: Yeah...


    I was sitting near the door. Mercenaries were so consumed with young me and companions that they didn¡¯t see me watching them. Young me stood up and came to door. Shouted back at Drolan and Anthon about going to attend the festive. Mercenaries and the fourth man left after them. I was walking behind them. Young me and companions changed their route and went into a small road intercrossing the main street we were on. I slowed down and stood for a while. Young me had kicked their asses by now. The fourth one run away but my eyes were on him. I increased my pace and went after him. While passing by the intercrossing road, I saw old me checking out right and left for the person who hired the mercenaries.


    I had a smile on my face while passing by young me, he didn¡¯t recognized me. I hadn¡¯t when I was back in his shoes. I increased my pace a bit more as I didn¡¯t want one ordering the hit to let off the hook. I caught up easily. Grabbing him was pointless so I went after him for a while to see where he goes or if there are more than one person who is involved in the process.


    He went into a house near the city centre. I could see him entering it panicking so I went after him. There was a long corridor, and few doors on each side. First one from the right was open and voices were coming from it.


    [-]: What happened?


    [-]: He killed them all. The kid. He is dangerous!


    [-]: How?


    [-]: I don¡¯t know... I am in shock...


    [-]: What I¡¯m going to tell to them now? We couldn¡¯t kill three useless bureucrats?


    [-]: I tell you, the young one was in good shape and he didn¡¯t even used sword! Bare hands man.


    [-]: Shit!


    [-]: Who ordered the hit?


    [-]: Shit! Shit!


    [-]: What¡¯s wrong Mike?


    [Mike]: Kadeer we have to get the hell out of this kingdom. Land of Tats. We should move there...


    Kadeer was Mike¡¯s employee. Mike was the one that I need. Entering room, I attacked Kadeer and broke his neck in one go using my hands to grab his head and twist it. Mike was in shock, his hands pressing on arm rests and pushing his body up. I walk towards him...


    [Me]: If you want to live, tell me who order the hit.


    [Mike]: Who are you?


    [Me]: It does not matter, tell me the names.


    [Mike]: Palace. Halim¡¯s attendant...


    Next: Chapter 54 - Tomorrow</a>

 Chapter 54 - Tomorrow.

    Rate, review & comment!


    ***********************


    Chapter 54 ¨C Tomorrow.


    [Mike]: Halim¡¯s attendant hired me.


    [Me]: Name?


    [Mike]: Ashod. He is Halim¡¯s right hand man. Arranges dirty jobs and looks after his private business.


    Halim having private business was a news to me. This world really corrupted to the core.


    [Me]: How much has he paid to you?


    [Mike]: 100 golds. I was planning to pay the mercenaries 20 golds each and keep 40 to myself.


    [Me]: 20 should be enough to go to Land of Tat¡¯s... Give me the rest.


    I got 80 gold coins from Mike. Made sure that he departed to Land of Tat¡¯s by ship next morning over lake Kasp. By this time, young me has already flied with balloon to Mehn.


    I sat in a restaurant near the port to make sure that the boat that Mike got on didn¡¯t come back.


    As Ulfberht had told me before, I could not inform my young self about my existence at all. Because he could do change the flow of time by doing things such as avoiding going to Luna¡¯s world with Gorn. In that case, rationally my existence would be impossible as I can not be here if he does not travel to that world. I would fade away as if I have never existed from the beginning.


    It was a good time to drink coffee and make plans about future. My future. How could I save my family? Should I become vizier or king? What I could do to pave a new path for myself while trying not to destruct it? Many questions arised as the possible answers to them in my mind. I asked for a pen and paper to write on while drinking coffee. King Dar hasn¡¯t died yet, has he?


    I bought a ticket to fly to Mehn that afternoon and flew there next morning. It took a day¡¯s flight to reach Mehn. Business was on my mind and I knew exactly what I have to do.


    There were some stupid laws such as if you had a bakery inside Mehn city, as owner of the bakery you had to pay lots of taxes. You had to pay for each worker that you had employed, there was land tax on bakery building, additionally sales taxes and so on. But if your bakery was just outside the Mehn you didn¡¯t pay none of those taxes to city officials. Extra cost would be transportation of bread and sweets to city.


    As soon as I reached air port in Mehn, I went out of city to village named Nanwei. It was few kilometers away from Mehn but was closest village to it. I bought a small 2 store house in Nanwei for 60 gold coins. Same day arranged a big oven to be build in it. It was going to take a week to properly install an oven in the house and I used that time to my advantage. For the first three days, I found 6 women from the village who could work for me to make bread and traditional sweets. I was going to pay 1 gold coin a month to each of them for their hard work. I talked with village elder so that I do not pay any kind of tax to them in return I will employ 6 women whether I make any profit and I will buy flour and yeast from locals at a market price.


    Later on I went back to Mehn to talk with shops who could sell my bread. I had made my calculations and by using one horse to carry load of breads to Mehn was going to cost me 2 copper coins a bread. In Mehn shops were buying breads for 5 copper coins and selling them for 6. I was going to sell for 3 copper coins.


    Three shops had order 1100 breads for first delivery. By the afternoon, three messenger¡¯s from those shops came with money for delivery and additional money for next day¡¯s order. On second day of trade we were already baking more than 5000 breads a day. Business was booming, and I hired another 6 women. In less than a week after beginning sales I ordered another two ovens to be installed in the house.


    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    Once in a while I was checking out my young self. He was doing fine which meant I had to do better.


    Bread and sweets that we were making was of the best quality and in Mehn shop¡¯s were already advertising that their products were from ¡°Luna¡¯s bakery¡±. Rain, snow, cloud or sunny the weather I was wearing long robe with a hoodie. I had fake beard on my face all the time and was going by the name Bartholomew in Nanwei.


    I was going after more opportunities in Mehn city. Bakery business had accumulated not that much of money but it was going to help me out in the long run. I rented a small restaurant in Mehn¡¯s boulevard. By using the income from bakery I invested in it and used Marquis Lucchi¡¯s methods to increased my income.


    Restaurant had a view to Kasp sea. I had a high payed chef who could cook lots of different styles of meals and good looking girls as waitresses to serve the customers. There were 2 bodyguards at the entrance at all times.  I had hired 4 of them. They were working in half an hour shifts. A customer who wanted to enter the restaurant had to pay 1 gold coin at the entrance. It was a high class restaurant, not for everyone to enter. Sometimes a rich man would pay almost few hundred gold coins a day just to reserve it only for its family on a special occasions such as birthdays.


    ¡°The Chevalier¡± was restaurants name. As you entered the restaurant, you had to pay 1 gold coin to the man sitting at the beginning of the hall. Waitress would come to you and ask for your coat or hats to be put on stand¡¯s for customers while giving you a number plate to keep. While giving your coat to the waitress, doorman would ring the bell and another waitress would come from inside to show you to your table according to number of people you have come up with. Same would be around your table all night long until you left, taking your orders, serving you meal and drinks. All the meals and drinks would be served by waitress to your glass or plate. Most of your needs would be taken care of as much as you dined with us. Live music was played all of the working hours.


    ¡°The Chevalier¡± project was my ticket to enter elite of Mehn. Important merchants, traders, courtesans, minister¡¯s were regulars of my restaurant. They knew me personally. Others were trying to imitate my style but couldn¡¯t. You can wear my shoes but can not walk the way I do. It was 2 months that I had opened baker and a month that I was running ¡°The Chevalier¡± that a messenger came to see me.


    [-]: I am Aaron. Ricat¡¯s nephew.


    [Me]: Who¡¯s Ricat?


    [Aaron]: He is an influential merchant. Uncle has been to your restaurant quite a few times.


    [Me]: I was told that you have a message for me?!


    [Aaron]: Yes, uncle Ricat wants to talk business with you in private. Mr. Bartholomew would you mind coming over to Ricat¡¯s mansion tomorrow afternoon?


    [Me]: Alright, pick me up at 11, tomorrow.


    Next: Chapter 55 - Proposal</a>

 Chapter 55 - Proposal

    Rate, review & comment!


    *********************


    NightinWolf''s recommendation to readers.


    Another good FF: Forsaken Hope</a>


    *********************


    Chapter 55 - Proposal


    By 10 o¡¯clock I was ready in my bakery waiting for Aaron to arrive. I had blood red colored robe on me, black leathery pants and white shirt. Moreover I was wearing a leather glove on my left hand to cover tattoo.


    Right now, women were cleaning the bakery and they would be ready to leave it in an hour. Work was mostly done at nights, as bread had to be ready before sunrise so that it could be transported to Mehn. I was checking out cleanliness of flour repesitory when Jamelia called out to me to come to front of the bakery.


    She was main force running ¡°Luna¡¯s bakery¡±.  In her 60ies, Jamelia was a woman with full qualifications to run a business and most important of all, an honest human being. I knew that she would never lie to me or screw me while doing business. It was her idea that to give extra wages to women who were showing examplary service throughout the month.


    [Me]: Jamelia you called me!


    [Jamelia]: There is a young one looking for you. Told me, his name is Aaron!


    [Me]: Yeah, I¡¯ve been waiting for him...


    Jamelia made a gesture with her face, another woman opened door and Aaron came in.


    [Aaron]: Morning, Mr Bartholomew.


    [Me]: Good morning Aaron. Are you hungry?


    [Aaron]: Thanks, but we should leave to get there on time.


    We reached Ricat¡¯s manor earlier than 11. Aaron offered me coffee and I took it. We were sitting around a wooden table drinking coffee when Elise came.


    [Elise]: Hey Aaron.


    [Aaron]: Hi. How are you?


    [Elise]: Fine... Who¡¯s the gentleman?


    [Aaron]: Uncle¡¯s guest. We will be meeting him in 10 minutes...


    [Elise]: Alright...


    She gazed at me for long... I sipped coffee few times.


    [Me]: Something wrong?


    [Elise]: It¡¯s just, you feel familiar to me. It seems like I know you.


    [Me]: If you¡¯ve been to Kastiff¡¯s and fought off beast men, then we may have meet each other...


    We laughed a bit...


    [Aaron]: We should go now...


    Entering their house, I relieved nostalgia as it didn¡¯t feel right to enter Ricat¡¯s house in this way and manner. Destiny?


    This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Aaron showed me into a small room. It was more like a personal library with lots of books covering the walls. There was a small round table with two stools beside it. Aaron told me to make myself at home and left. I sat on one of them.


    Ricat entered room with two cups of tea, each at one of his hands. I stood up to help him out.


    [Ricat]: It¡¯s alright... I can manage.


    He put them on table. There was one qand on each saucer. Steams coming off from the tea cups, were filling room with strong black tea aroma.


    Ricat took qand from the saucer using his index, middle and thumb fingers of the right hand and put it into his mouse. Later on took the tea cup and had few sips. I smiled. It was good to be back at home.


    [Ricat]: I heard some interesting things about you, Mr. Bartholomew.


    [Me]: Bartholomew is good enough. What kind of interesting things?


    [Ricat]: It¡¯s about your success. It just seems unbelievable to be able to reach this heights in this short amount of time without any support. You have done the impossible in last two months.


    [Me]: For me, hard things take few hours to accomplish, impossible ¨C no more than a day.


    [Ricat]: Hahaa... I like that! I like people who are stubborn and know what they do!


    [Me]: It¡¯s good having a chat about this and that but I suppose I am here...


    [Ricat]: Bartholomew no need to hurry up things. We are just getting to know each other.


    [Me]: I think you already know more than enough about me. You have done your job, havent you?


    [Ricat]: It¡¯s another thing to hear it out from your own mouth. I have never met someone with your name. I travel a lot.


    [Me]: It feels like a crime investigation.


    [Ricat]: So who are you?


    [Me]: Bartholomew is not my name. Whoever I was two months ago is already in past. You should not be worried about that as I am not a criminal.


    Ricat put his left hand under his chin while his left arm standing on table. He was looking to his left as if in deep thoughts. I do not know what kind of game he was playing but I was tired of it. I stood up. His face turned to me...


    [Me]: You seem like a free man with lots of time, but I have business to attend to. If you excuse me, I¡¯ll be leaving now...


    I made few steps towards door when he caught my right arm from behind.


    [Ricat]: I have a proposal.


    Next: Chapter 56 - Mapmaker</a>

 Chapter 56 - Mapmaker

    Rate, review & comment!


    ***********************


    Chapter 56 ¨C Mapmaker.


    [Me]: What kind of?


    [Ricat]: Business with a flavour of adventure.


    [Me]: I¡¯m not a mercenary...


    [Ricat]: You have extraordinary dagger no you. You have gone through some hardships I reckon. Now, you want to hear my offer?


    [Me]: I¡¯m listening!


    [Ricat]: In land of beastmen, there is a tree. Not so important to them but very rare and expensive in human lands...


    [Me]: ironwood...


    [Ricat]: You are very knowledgeable... Yes, I¡¯m talking about Iron Tree. I¡¯m making a group of warriors, adventurers and merchants to go to lands of beastmen and bring me one whole tree. There are already 19 members ready to go, I¡¯m planning to put you into the team. The pay will be 5000 gold coins per person.


    [Me]: Heh.. (I sighed with a sarcastic smile on my face)


    [Ricat]: That¡¯s more than enough to have a carefree life till the end of time. Think wisely...


    [Me]: I¡¯m not interested in gold.


    [Ricat]: What you want then?


    [Me]: Ironwood is used as a decoration in Kali tribes newly elected elder¡¯s throne. It has always been like that.


    [Ricat]: I don¡¯t get you!?


    [Me]: A new one.


    [Ricat]: I¡¯m not from Kali tribe. I have no idea about Kali tribe¡¯s customs...


    [Me]: Halim is. Is King Dar retiring or dying?


    [Ricat]: It¡¯s a request from very influential and wealthy family which I will not discuss with anybody. Now do you...


    I cut off his words.


    [Me]: I don¡¯t care. I just asked you a question. You don¡¯t have to elaborate on who or why hired you for this. Even if somebody hired you or you are doing a favor to someone else...


    [Ricat]: So?


    [Me]: 2000 gold coins and...


    [Ricat]: Weren¡¯t you uninterested in gold?


    [Me]: Changed my mind!


    [Ricat]: And what?


    [Me]: Your friendship and support in future.


    Ricat stood still for sometime. I was looking at him but was clueless about what was going through his head.


    [Ricat]: We are leaving next week. Monday morning there will be a special balloon ship taking us to Tigran city. I hope you will be there...


    [Me]: Goodbye!


    I left Ricat in room while going straight to door to exit the manor. Elise was standing by one of the pillars outside the door talking to a servant. I passed by them and ride my horse all the way to ¡°Luna¡¯s bakery¡± in Nanwei.


    Jamelia was surprised by my offer regarding ¡°The Chevalier¡±, so she asked me to discuss it with her husband that night and give me an answer by morning next day. I asked her to regulate bakery and ¡°The Chevialier¡± in my absense as manager of both businesses. In the morning, when I approached her in bakery, she told me to wait until cleaning finished. Around 8 o¡¯clock a young man in his early twenties came in to the bakery. Normally, I didn¡¯t allow any men in bakery as husbands of my workers would not let them to work for me if there were men involved in it.


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    He intoruced himself as Jamal, told me a little bit about his background. I felt as if it was some kind of job application. His credentials were reliable though. Jamelia brought 3 cups of tea and we sat on to discuss business matters.


    [Jamelia]: Mr. Bartholomew, Jamal is my eldest son. I talked to my husband yesterday and we came to decision that it would be much more better if Jamal administered your restaurant. Most probably he has told you before but let me point it out again that he has worked as a waiter in many restaurants. He is a smart kids with good intuition. If you will accept please, let him administer ¡°The Chevalier¡± while I manage bakery.


    [Me]: I¡¯m going to leave next Monday, so he has few days to prove to me what he is capable of.


    We drank tea and made few jokes. Jamal was hardworking and smart fella. By the end of his second shift I told him that he is going to be the boss in my absence.


    As always, I was training basics daily. Running, push-ups, pull-ups and bench-presses were part of my daily routine. I was trying to stay fit and healthy. On Sunday night I slept early to wake up on Monday morning without getting late.


    My backpack was filled with 3 leather pants, 5 long-sleeve shirts, 2 robes and 2 pairs of shoes. I didn¡¯t take any meals or fruits as I thought Ricat would be covering our travel needs including accomodation and meals.


    Early morning, I woke up as cocks were already crowing indicating the sun was about to rise. Put on my clothes, got on my horse and rode it to air port. Jamal was coming with me, so that to take my horse back after I left.


    Ricat was already there as we reached the balloon port. There were 15 men including me, and 5 women. By looks most of them were either warriors or mages except three.


    Ricat introduced me to rest of the crew. Some of them were newbies who were acting like tough big boys, and some were experienced mages and warriors. Most important of all was the man who was introduced last. His name was Ashod. Ricat told that he is an expert craftsman and mapmaker.


    Next: Chapter 57 - Plan</a>

 Chapter 57 - Plan

    Rate, review & comment!


    Sorry for LATE release, was busy these past few days...


    ******************


    Chapter 57 ¨C Plan.


    As always, it was much more easier to me to get familiar with women rather than men. That must be the reason why rest of crewmembers were looking at me with despising eyes. I didn¡¯t care way to much about anyone except Ashod. Reason why most of them were with us was money. Lots of money. Enough to cover their expenses till the end of their lives. Maybe I would have agreed without thinking much, if I was my young self but in this case knowing what future holds for our world , money was not an issue to be taken seriously.


    World was going to be upside down in few years and a new order will be established after my old self¡¯s and Gorn¡¯s disappearance. I was planning and getting ready for that moment.


    Going back to trip to land of beastmen, we were getting to know each other as days passed. It was a long trip to Tigran even though we were on a balloon ship which was much more faster than riding horses. Time was playing into Ricat¡¯s hands to make sure that crewmembers know each other well and are accustomed into each other before we get to danger zone.


    Simone, Lajla, Zahra, Sheila and Anja were mages who were accompanying us. Anja and Sheila were healer type of magus while Simone, Lajla and Zahra knew spells and chants that were offensive type. All of them had battle experience, mainly have been actively involved in battles in different bridges before the truce between Kingdom of Kali and Demon Lord Kimbra. Ricat didn¡¯t know much about me, but I knew well who he was and what he was capable of in dire times. Rest of the crew were not much of interest to me, while I have to admit that most of them were from Kali tribe and capable warriors.


    Ashod was introduced as an accomplished mapmaker and craftsman. Ricat and Ashod could lie to rest of crew but not to me. Those hands of him were more like of a woman¡¯s rather than a craftman¡¯s hand. Too delicate to carve anything, too delicate to be writing or drawing maps for long time. Those hands and body were of a man who was a wanna be noble but not one yet. His reddish hair, black eyes and white skin with reddened hair on it made him look like a fox in my eyes. Beauty is in the eyes of beholder¡¯s. He was good with words, and sometimes it felt as if he is Ricat¡¯s boss rather than how they made it look like as if Ricat has hired him.


    For almost three weeks balloon ship landed once a day to resupply fuel and water so that we do not delay until we reach Tigran. I was learning stuff from Anja and Sheila, especially healing magic. The idea behind it was pretty simple though application was hard enough. Especially if you tried to heal somebody else. Simply put mana was channeled to body in atomic level to restructure places of injury. However process was much more complicated. I tried few times and Sheila was into teaching me how to do it but I couldn¡¯t.


    Tigran was a border city. It was closest city to Kastiff Mountain Range in north-east of Kingdom of Kali. Closest mountain was renamed to Hallum few years ago. None of us get to know Tigran as we reached it after the sunset and rested in a inn called ¡°White Rabbit¡± for night. Early in the morning, Ricat gave all of us enough food to put into our backpacks to cover our meals throughout the journey to and back from northern lands. We took dry rice with us, smoked fish and smoked beef. Handful of rice could feed a man for day as boiling it was the best way in travels such as this one.


    Eyes can not grasp distance properly if we are talking about long range area. Far enough, as we stood on our horses, few of crewmembers thought that we will be near Hallum after few hours of ride but it took us almost a day as there were members who were not adapted to riding horses for long hours. It looks elementary but after riding a horse for more than few hours, part of your body in between your legs gets so painful that you may have problems getting off the horse even after riding it. Joints get numb, or I felt so when I was young.


    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    Hallum Pass was not an easy place to go through. Mainly it was due to snow covering it almost all seasons. That was why a legion was station on our side of Hallum becuase beastmen who would want to attack us had to pass Hallum first. It was a long and tiring journey and beastmen would weaken by the time they reached our side.


    Ricat showed few papers stampted by officials from Mehn which were like permission for us to pass to north. Battalion commander was called Azer. He was from our tribe. He told us about few tips and tricks about first part of our journey.


    It took us almost 5 days to come half way through Hallum¡¯s pass. We were walking from sunrise to sunset. At dusk we were setting up our tents to sleep and 2 warriors were protecting us while rest of us slept. A warrior called Azim was trying to get close to me. He was a small in height. Maybe 5¡¯4¡¯¡¯ but not more than that. He had wide shoulders and his build was of like a rock. Big sword and a hammer was on him at all times. He was a funny fella but sounded stupid sometimes.  As we talked more and more I got to know that he was trying to hang out with me to get close to women. He had a funny accent.


    It was on eighth¡¯s night that a pack of wolves attacked us but Azim and others defended perfectly while Simone and Zahra used magic to fend them off. Fortunately, nobody was injured. Wolf attack was swift, and our reply was indeed very well. Most probably warriors who were hired had fought together, that¡¯s why they were in perfect arrangement when counter-attacking wolves. Ashod was bystanding in calm manner which caught my attention. I assume he was a mage but was hiding his abilities to his best. Probability it was but Ricat was panicking while Ashod stood still to observe as if he was in control of situation and could reverse it according to his will. Nevertheless, wolves are not beastmen so it does not mean anything.


    Next morning we were in a point on Hallum from where we could monitor north lands by eye. View was heart-warming. Forests everywhere as much as eye could catch. Flock of birds flying over trees and landing on them. Initial evaluation that popped up in my mind was that beastmen were like elves in sense they were living in balance with nature. I couldn¡¯t see any high-rise building or cement made walls anywhere. I like it that way, but nevertheless human society is different to others because of our group mentality that spawns from physicial and magical weaknesses in comparison to elves, dwarves, beastmen or demons.


    By the time we got off Hallum mountain, our perception of surrounding changed. Ricat told that according to information that he has got from his source we had to walk into forest close to two days in north-west direction.


    [Ricat]: I was told that historically it has been in that course.


    [Me]: Inside information, ha?


    [Sheila]: What you mean, B? (Females were calling me B, instead of pronouncing Bartholomew)


    [Me]: HISTORICALLY only Kali tribe has used Iron Tree...


    [Zahra]: Most of us are from Kali tribe... Never heard of it before...


    [Me]: Whatever. If its two days of walk, then it means today we going to sleepover in forest?


    [Ashod]: Yes... Right on spot. Should we move now, Mr know it all Bartholomew?


    [Me]: We should but before there is something we have to do!


    [Ashod]: Do you understand that you are stalling us? (in high voice)


    [Azim]: Oi big shot, ca¡¯m do¡¯n. Ba¡¯tholom¡¯w is ri¡¯t, we got¡¯a hav¡¯ a plan.


    Next: Chapter 58 - Sr''et?</a>

 Chapter 58 –Sr’et?

    Rate, review and comment!


    Chapter 58 ¨CSr¡¯et?


    Forest was not as thick as it was seen from Hallum. Trees were big and large with lots of branches reaching almost sky. Ground was not deserted either, small thorns and shrubs had covered every possible inch. Large stones, rocks and stems of trees up to some point were concealed by moss. It felt as natural as it should get.


    As a result, our path was wide enough for us to walk in as a group. Getting back earlier, plan was that two warriors with few minutes differences from each other would walk in front of us as scouts to spy on area while we walked behind them. Sheila and Anja were casting detection magic in turns which covered small area but was useful as not to miss any animal or beastmen.


    We walked for quite a while and weather was getting dark too. Tired, we began to set up tents to sleep over when I sensed something familiar lurking around.


    [Me]: Sheila, do you sense something?


    [Sheila]: It seems like a wolf is circling around us.


    [Me]: You sure it is a wolf?


    [Azim]: Wat¡¯ cha¡¯ me¡¯n?


    [Me]: I¡¯m not sure myself, it just seems very familiar.


    [Jubel]: I though you are a merchant?!


    [Me]: Sensing danger is not just a mage¡¯s or warrior¡¯s attribute...


    [Azim]: Wa¡¯t-eva, sleeeep tim¡¯


    Azim was not an educated fella but listening to him I was doing my best not to laugh as he was chopping up words and sentences anyway he wanted. After midnight, Anja woke me up as for the next two hours it was going to be our shift to protect tents while checking out surroundings. A small fire was on, and we were sitting by it. Anja had told me that her detection magic was on so there was no need to walk around tents as if something got close to us she should feel danger in time.


    We had few cups of hot tea and chit-chatted about this and that when my werewolf powers came to my help. I sensed, actually it was more like I smelled different odors which didn¡¯t belong to any of us though smells were coming from close to us.


    [Me]: Anja, how do you know if someone or something is coming at us?


    [Anja]: Detection magic is like an invisible circle with a 500 meter diameter around us... If something steps within that distance on it, I feel it.


    [Me]: What if...


    [Anja]: what if what?


    [Me]: What if they use trees to move? What if they are jumping from one tree to another?


    [Anja]: I could do that too, but there is no need for that, isn¡¯t it?


    [Me]: Anja, go to tents and wake everyone up!


    I took out Ulfberht who was in dagger form. Looking up at trees I could not normally see anything but by applying werewolf powers and instincts my eyes got more concentrated and I could feel even motion of small leaves on top of trees.


    I knew it, there were three human size beastmen above us on trees. I couldn¡¯t see them clearly as they were on branches with lots of leaves on them but they were there.


    [Azim]: Waz¡¯ w¡¯on?


    [Me]: We have guests. Three of them!


    Others took out their weapons and got in defensive positions as Anja and Sheila confirmed existence of three beastmen on trees.


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    [Sheila]: One of them is coming down from tree...


    [Ashod]: Kill them!!!


    Ricat was trembling in fear and Ashod was chanting something.


    [Sheila]: It stopped, and now other two are moving in same direction towards first beastman.


    [Me]: Even if they come down, do not attack them!


    [Ashod]: Kill them all! Why the heck we should not attack them?


    [Me]: Because if they wanted they could have attacked us before! There is something else, and if they come down we should get know...


    [Ashod]: Bullshit! You can not reason with a beastman!


    [Azim]: Shuuuuuut ¡®p!


    In a moment three beastmen appeared in front of us, a bit away from fire. All of them had cat like ears. One of them was a female while the other two were males. Their tails were wagging and flicking while they stood up. I think they jumped down so I¡¯m not sure as I was looking at Ashod and Azim as we were talking before their appearance.


    One of them had a massive axe with him. It was so thrice size of beastmen who was holding it. Other one had to small swords on him. Female one was holding two sais in her hands. They had intimidating looks, terrifying aura surrounding them though they were not similar aura which I sensed while we were travelling. Female had big racks which I gazed at for a while until beastman with the axe spoke.


    [-]: Humans die! Killers die!


    I stayed behind with Ashod and Ricat while others were fighting them. Impressive part of the fight was that three of them were holding their grounds against 17 from our side including mages who were healing them and attacking with fire and water magic simultaneously. Fight lasted for another few minutes which I checked out intensely to see what everyone else was capable of. I didn¡¯t want to involve myself as I did not assumed that our side will lose.


    I sensed same aura again for second time. It was somewhere close. This time, it was sending off killing intent which I felt even though, whatever it was, it was not close to us yet.


    I took out Ulfberht in dagger form. I knew Ashod and Ricat had their eyes on me, glaring in interest to see what I was going to do. Normally, I wouldn¡¯t want to show my cards but chilling aura was dangerous. Beastmen were not of importance in comparison to it. I walked up few steps, closed my eyes and it began. Mana was overflowing from my body. High quantity of mana bursted as if it was a bomb which exploded and big shockwave went in all directions epicenter being me. Opening my eyes, I saw beastmen and crew members looking at me in shock. My attention was at the other being though.


    [Me]: Beastmen we are no killers! Real threat is coming at us right now as we speak.


    They looked like from direwolf tribe. I hope they could smell, hear and sense as I was able to. As of now, us fighting them was pointless.


    [Azim]: Wat sr¡¯et?


    Next: Chapter 59 - Join me?</a>

 Chapter 59 - Join me?

    Thank you all for your support!


    I closed poll from last chapter few minutes ago. Overall result was that I continue story as I had planned so a rushed ending is no more a choice...


    Results of poll:


    For more click on: POLL RESULTS</a>


    *********************


    Rate, review & comment!


    *********************


    Chapter 59 ¨CJoin me?


    I anticipated almost every move it made. Unbelievable fast it was coming for beastmen, I assumed, so I run behind them. To my surprise, at the last moment it¡¯s direction changed as if feeling me and altering its trajectory in a circular manner. Time was in slow motion, I turned my body to left gradually to keep up with menace that was moving around us. After a full circle, it went for a second one.


    Sheila and Anja were horrified as they could sense monster¡¯s speed and body structure better than me because of their magic. Anja screamed...


    [Anja]: It¡¯s flying...


    Hearing her, I shouted out at Ricat and Ashod to ¡°get down!!!¡±... Ricat was already down to ground but Ashod was not perceiving what was happening as it didn¡¯t take few seconds for everything to happen. Most hadn¡¯t fully understood situation when Gorn flew out of behind tree towards Ashod and Ricat who were seperated from rest with a few meters distance.


    I do not think that Ashod felt any pain. ¡°Did he even felt anything at all?¡±


    Gorn was in his wyrm form, not a full grown dragon yet but still dangerous as is. He chopped of Ashod¡¯s head in one go while flying over him. Ashod¡¯s body was still up standing while Gorn did a forceful landing on ground on all four. It was chewing Ashod¡¯s head like a normal person would eat a normal size meatball.


    Blood squirting out of it¡¯s neck, Ashod¡¯s body fell down. It was the moment, when everyone felt reality of situation in which we all were. Male beastman threw his large axe at Gorn with incredible force, which Gorn in return just used his left wing to smack axe into woods as though it was a toy.


    Fear. It was the only thing that was spreading around while Gorn was munching and gobbling up Ashod¡¯s head. Nobody moved out of fear. Beastmen were astounded too. It was not a mature wyrm yet, but Gorn was standing in such a way that as if he was the ruler of all and we were in its mercy. Not mercy, more like part of menu.


    I took initiative and attacked it. Gorn tried to block Ulfberht by using its wing again. I scratched it on purpose. Second blow was misdirected to not harm him too. It took off in a moment and flew away. I looked back at Ricat, trembling in fear while lying on ground his hands covering his head.


    [Azim]: Wow! S¡¯out ye a¡¯r m¡¯rkant!


    [Me]: Ricat stand up! Hey beastmen introduce yourselves!


    [-]: I¡¯m Baran of direwolf tribe. Thank you for saving us.


    [Me]: Did you attack us on purpose?


    [-]: We were not aware of your existence until we met you few hours back. Some of our tribesmen were brutally killed in the last few days and upon sawing you, we thought that you are perpetrators.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    Female direwolf¡¯s voice was so sweet in comparison to her rough build. My mind swifted away for a moment.


    [Me]: Who are you?


    [-]: I¡¯m Kiara. This is my brother Dylan. Baran introduced himself earlier.


    [Dylan]: What brings you to our lands?


    [Me]: We want to take a tree with us. Iron Tree.


    [Dylan]: The ones with green leaves all year around?


    [Me]: Yes!


    [Dylan]: Normally, when humans come after those trees most of them die before getting one tree with them but this time we will make an exception because of your help.


    [Me]: Thank you! Be careful though, that wyrm is not a proper dragon yet...


    [Ricat]: I-I-I-It i-i-i-is tru den...


    [Me]: Ricat are you imitating Azim?


    Everyone had a laugh after my words...


    [Me]: It is gone, do not worry...


    [Ricat]: Dragon... It really exists...


    We shared our meals with direwolf tribe members. Dylan and Kiara were offsprings of tribe elder. They assured us that we will not be attacked as much as we do not left their area.


    I talked to Ricat for a while in private. Ashod was really Halim¡¯s right hand man. Ricat did not know why they needed Iron Tree, so I explained to him everything in detail. I did not tell him that I was from future just told him that Iron Tree is used only when a new tribe elder is chosen.


    Gorn was a useless monster who knew one thing ¨C to kill. Ashod had to be gotten rid of, Gorn did a big favor to me by killing him in front of many eyewitnesses.


    [Me]: I think Halim wants to assimilate Kali tribe values to Kingdom of Kali¡¯s rulership. Most probably he will use tree to decorate a new throne...


    [Ricat]: Why would he do that? Why a new throne?


    [Me]: A new king who gets a new throne, as in Kali tribe...


    My words made sense but was too much of a shock to him after everything had happened. Ricat was a useless person, but a useful figure can be made out of him. Especially if right moves were made he could replace Ashod. Actually he was best possible candidate after bringing Iron Tree to Halim.


    Next day we reached and retrieved an Iron Tree. Magic was used to carry it, though branches were cut off to make sure that only big stem part was taken with us. During our travel back to Mehn, I began to talk to Ricat and try to recruit him without him knowing what was going to happen. Daily I was implanting ideas into his mind, I was manipulating him by using fear...


    [Me]: Ricat do not tell me that you thought Demon Lord Kimbra would lie about dragon?


    ...


    [Me]:  You got a kid don¡¯t you?


    [Me]: Oh, more than one! God bless them, so how are you going to protect them when a full attack is made?


    ...


    [Me]: What I know about dragon? Nothing much, same as most. But I¡¯m worried.. Worried for humanity, and I¡¯m not going to stand by to wait until threat knocks on my door.


    ...


    [Me]: Do you want to be part of resistance?


    ...


    [Me]: Resistance is going to be made up of people like you and me who are going to protect our homes, families and country when time comes!


    ...


    [Me]: Are you sure you want to join me?


    Next: Chapter 60 - The Guard</a>

 Chapter 60 - The Guard

    Rate, review, and comment!


    Chapter 60 ¨C The Guard


    [Ricat]: So what¡¯s your real name?


    [Me]: I¡¯ve forgotten it long time ago. You know my beard is not black, I¡¯m dying it that colour. That¡¯s why it seems a bit off...


    [Ricat]: Hahaa.. really?


    [Me]: Yes... I have a story to tell to you.


    [Ricat]: I¡¯m listening...


    [Me]: After establishing Kingdom of Kali, king Dark insured kingdom¡¯s protection from south, north and west by arranging forces of warriors and mages in proper battalions to be permanently settled in areas of potential warfare. I was young when I joined one of bridges to protect from demons. Young and hot blooded...


    [Ricat]: You really are a mage!


    [Me]: I¡¯m a warrior with lots of mana capacity..  Now, once during the latest attack ¨C one of raiding demons turned back and ran. So I went after it, I caught up with it after a day¡¯s march. I killed it mercilesly. I was young and inexperienced in matters of life back in those days. In that moment, I decided to charge demon lands and kill as many demons as possible. It took me more than a week to reach to other side of bridge...


    [Ricat]: You went to demon realm? What happened later on?


    [Me]: Unexpected happened. Most of demons were friendlier to me, and I got to learn  prophecy about revival of dragon. I did not come back to our side until recently when a human delegation came to demon lands to meet their lord.


    [Ricat]: Wow, so you have lived with demons for more than a decade then?


    [Me]: I have lost count of time... Maybe two decades, maybe less..


    [Ricat]: Why now?


    [Me]: Signs of revival were everywhere... I knew that I had to help, but I didn¡¯t know how. So I came to build my own wealth to help out people who will need help when time comes. In time, dragon will grow up to unbelievable size, and killing it will be job of heroes. What do you think will happened to common folk?


    [Ricat]: Die?


    [Me]: Exactly. I¡¯m not saying that I will save everyone. But I will save as many as I can whether you want to join the cause or not...


    [Ricat]: I¡¯ve already told you. I want to be part of it..


    [Me]: You have to prove yourself to be part of it.


    [Ricat]: How?


    [Me]: Was Ashod Halim¡¯s right hand man?


    [Ricat]: Yes, he was. I wanted...


    [Me]: Whatever has happened already has happened. Dead do not belong in realm of living. I want you take to initiative while giving Iron Tree to Halim to get to his position. That¡¯s your test...


    [Ricat]: You want me to be Halim¡¯s adjutant?


    [Me]: More like his personal aide... Ashod is no more with us.


    [Ricat]: I though you are not interested in power.


    [Me]: No, I¡¯m not. But without power, knowledge and wealth how can we build fortifications, bunker and shelters? Do you know someone who will build them to us for free? Do you know people of power who will not question why are we building them?


    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    [Ricat]: They will understand when they meet the dragon.


    [Me]: It will be too late when they will it. Better to be safe than sorry.


    Ricat nodded in agreement and we went to sleep. We reached Tigran after two days, Azim and Ricat flew directly to Mehn with Iron Tree while we stayed in Tigran overnight to rest.


    By the time, I reach Mehn, King Dar¡¯s death was made public and new king was installed. Halim was going to lead Kingdom of Kali. I did not care about politics of Kingdom of Kali as in near future balance will be broken after Gorn¡¯s attack and demolition of almost all of the world.


    I was sitting in my personal office in ¡°The Chevalier¡± drinking tea and making plans about future when Ricat came in with two more people. I shook their hands and showed them armchairs to seat. It was past afternoon, so I offered them meals in case if they were hungry. All of them declined offer and we began to talk...


    [Ricat]: Bartholomew, meet my friends. Ruler of Tigran region appointed by King Halim amir Kirk. We are childhood friends. And mayor of Ark City Rychyld. I took my pleasure to talk to Kird and Rychyld about what had happened in lands of beastmen. Informing them about dragon and the threat what it imposed. They share same concern as I do and would like to support our cause both morally and financially.


    [Me]: Thank you Ricat. Most probably Ricat has told you about who I am, has he?


    [Rychyld]: Yes, he has.


    [Me]: What I¡¯m offering you is not just your family¡¯s and humanity¡¯s safety! You will benefit from this deal after the dragon is killed as you will be saviours of your region¡¯s people. They will support you voluntarily after armageddon will pass.


    [Kirk]: How can you be so sure? How you know dragon will be killed? Ricat told us that after sometime it will be almost invincible!


    [Me]: Killing the dragon is not our job. Ricat knows the chosen one who will kill it.


    [Ricat]: Who? Me? I do not know any hero.


    [Me]: The Kid!


    [Ricat]: You mean...


    [Me]: No need to tell his name. It will be known when time comes...


    [Rychyld]: What¡¯s in it for you? Why are you doing this? Ricat told us you have no family and friends.


    [Me]: Death... Death awaits me. Most probably I will die battling the dragon BUT I will not let it destroy humanity...


    There were smiles on their faces. They knew they can trust me, and moreover all of them had potential economic and political gains to be made after dragon¡¯s attack..


    I put up my left arm up to sky. My right hand clenching into a fist.


    [Me]: It¡¯s time to take steps to protect humanity from future threats. We are the last stand between destruction and salvation. Welcome to ¡°The Guard¡±!


    Next: Chapter 61 - Ambitions</a>

 Chapter 61 - Ambitions

    Rate, review and comment!


    **********************


    Chapter 61 ¨C Ambitions


    Young me was doing fine. I made sure that no harm may come to my young self after Ricat was officially appointed as Halim¡¯s aide. It took time but Halim¡¯s changed his mind about me after Ricat insisted that he will deal with young me without use of force. He was still going to work daily and living in a unit near Ministry of Defense.


    Ricat and me had long talks after midnights, especially brainstorming ideas about what we could do and how. Kirk and Rychyld were informed weekly about thoughts and decisions regarding our plans and they were sending replies to our messages using pigeons to send and recieve messages. After long discussions and Ricat¡¯s lobbying our cause in palace, we decided to build temples. Temples that we were going to build were not meant to brainwash or indoctrinate any religion. They were going to protect them when the time comes.


    Architects throughout the kingdom were welcomed in Mehn to come up with plans and designs for a building that could be used to protect citizens of Kingdom of Kali from dragon¡¯s attack. Ricat brought together warriors, mages and me who were involved in Iron Tree quest to meet architects who were involved in planning to meet us for questioning about the dragon. Productivity of their work would increase if they knew what kind of building was needed to protect masses from single but vicious dragon. I gave them hints about dragon¡¯s possible size, and its fire breathing possibility and so on. I have to underline that neither public nor government was aware of this project.


    In a month time, more than few hundred plans and models were brought in front of the commision consisting of Ricat, me and Kirk. We selected few models to consider


    During this time number of members increased and ¡°The Guard¡± became more and more influential as time passed. We had amirs of different provinces, wealthy merchants, courtesans from palace and different regions who pledged their alliance to our cause. As a result, I was moving from one city to another, from one village to another to meet those in person and talk to them about our plans. Members were joining new ones to our cause. Rules were written to make sure secrecy of our cause and organization.


    1. Existence of ¡°The Guard¡± was to be kept secret.


    2. ¡°The Guard¡± consisted of small groups of 4 and local meetings were to be made one on one and arranged so that 1 member knew only the other 2.


    In almost every other group except the first four, everyone knew me as the fourth member. After month and half of travel I stopped going to meetings as one selected member was coming to meet me in capital once a fortnight.


    First prototype of Temple of Guardians was build in Nanwei. In papers my name was shown as the funder of construction. At the south side of village looking towards in direction of Ark City a small pyramid was built. It was two and half meters in height and had a wooden gate to enter. Inside there was nothing but the statue of late King Dar. Trick was that if turned a full 360 degrees and pushed down a door would open to underground bunker which could hold up to 6000 people. It was not a grand palace but a hidden shelter to house up to 6000 villagers for few days in case dragon attacked.


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    It was 5th of Elaisis. My younger self would be celebrating his 18th birthday while I was twenty and two years old. Wind was blowing slowly, creating a cool breeze that refreshed everyone. Jamelia and Ricat were besides me while villagers of Nanwei were looking at awe to us from distance. King¡¯s guard was keeping them off as assasination attempt may occur. Few hundred knighted warriors were standing side-by-side creating a wall of meat to make sure that no human passed by them. There were mages who had casted spells to identify any possible physical or magical attack in advance.


    Halim was standing in front of us while there was a hill behind us made from soil and dirt when space for underground shelter was dugged. It was covered with green lawn and flowers that blossomed most of time except cold winters. In between hill and us Temple of Dar was located.


    With slow but witty steps Halim walked towards us to stop a step away.


    [Halim]: Ricat, you told me alot and wanted me to attend this so-called Temple¡¯s opening.


    [Ricat]: Yes, Your Grace!


    [Halim]: But my father was no divine man.


    [Me]: A visionary my king. He was a visionary!


    [Halim]: So who I am then?


    [Me]: Chosen one who continues legacy of the great one!


    [Halim]: You must be Bartholomew. Ricat told me about you.


    [Me]: Your grace has honored me more than any wealth or fame that could by remembering my name.


    [Halim]: You are flattering me.


    [Me]: Its truth my lord, as God is our sun and shield.


    [Halim]: Tell me what purpose this temple aims at?


    [Me]: It¡¯s to honor the great emperor who brought together most of humanity under same roof. Protected and prospered us. We shall pray to him to be in peace in other world, so a place needs to be made for common folk to remember him. I volunteered for this mission and Lord Ricat accepted my good intentions promising to tell you about our deeds.


    [Halim]: Hahaa.. What do you want? Power? Title? Lands?


    [Me]: Nothing of sort my lord. I want your blessings.


    [Halim]: Blessings for what?


    [Me]: Blessings to build Temple¡¯s of Dar all over the kingdom to honor late King Dar.


    [Halim]: You have my blessings though do you have enough gold?


    [Me]: I do not, but this is not just I who was involved in it. Most of the village contributed.


    [Halim]: Do people love me as much as they loved my father?


    [Me]: If they didn¡¯t they would not be here to see your grace¡¯s face, illuminating the village by your presence.


    [Halim]: Ricat add Bartholomew to guest list for my 100th day celebrations.


    [Ricat]: Yes, Your Grace!


    [Me]: You honored me again my lord.


    He laughed and went away, Ricat following him by his side. Guards made way for them to pass through. Two mages went ahead of them while another two behind them casting some kind of invisible shield.


    Next: Chapter 62 - Keep the change!</a>

 Chapter 62 - Keep the change!

    Rate, Review and Comment!


    ******************************


    Chapter 62 ¨C Keep the change!


    It did not take long for my young self to move back to original village. I remember that I had around 1200 cold coins with myself when I went back. Following him with a few days of difference I went to Myrim city. It was one of two cities that emerged close to original village.


    Though it was called a city, in comparison to Mehn it was more like a ward. I knew that it was going to get larger as time will pass and my young self will begin to trade with this city. We were going to open another Temple of Dar to pubic close to Myrim so my travel to there was like killing two birds with one stone.


    2500 gold coins which I got from Ricat to get the Iron Tree was handy this time. I had send a pigeon to our guardian brother in Myrim in advance for him to order cattle and sheep that would cost 2500 gold coins.


    Mayor of Myrim rode with me and Krayon to Temple of Dar. Krayon was our initiate for ¡°The Guard¡± from Myrim. He had been involved in building Temple of Dar back in some other province which I can not remember the name. Because of business interests he had moved to Myrim few months ago. He recruited two new members from Myrim and with financial support from different regions, in less than a month time he had managed to build Temple and bunker.


    I was standing by Krayon when Mayor of Myrim entered the temple by opening its wooden doors. Candle was lighted and put in front of late King Dar¡¯s statue. Mayor did a prayer by murmuring something and made a speech in front of people who were with us for event. Krayon went in after Mayor and people began to go inside though one-by-one to give their prayers.


    In less than few hours Krayon and I were the only ones left near temple. He had refreshing smile on his face most probably because of his accomplishment.


    [Krayon]: Brother Bartholomew are you going to join us in Myrim?


    [Bartholomew]: No, why?


    [Krayon]: Cattle and sheep that you ordered made me think so...


    [Bartholomew]: No, I¡¯m going to sell them. More like you will sell them.


    [Krayon]: You are not a good merchant brother, you will lose at least few hundred golds...


    [Bartholomew]: I will sell it for less than half the price I bought it for.


    Patting his back using my right hand, I asked him to go back to Myrim for lunch. On the way, I explained him that a young man will come for a trade, and we will sell it for 1200 gold coins and his relatives in Mehn will reimburse for rest of money in capital city later on. Clueless as he is, he nodded listening to every word that came from my mouth.


    We were referring to each other as brother or sister so that nobody could or should inferior or superior to another. ¡°The Guard¡± was an organization where your background did not matter although most of us were wealthy.


    In Myrim, Krayon referred me to a restaurant while he went after few business deals that he had to finish. It was a nice restaurant while most of the customers were either mercenaries or small time merchant who came with them. I sat near a table with three stools beside it. Waiter came for order and I asked him for a slice of well cooked beef with mashed potates and cup of wine.


    Wine was served first, and as I was having first few sips not-so tall but a well-build man with a sword near his hip came up to me.


    [-]: Old man I¡¯m going to borrow these two stools for my friends to sit on...


    He pointed towards a bunch of people who were sitting near three tables that were brought together. Bunch of drunk mercenaries. I smiled...


    Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    [Me]: My son, I need only one to sit on.


    He grabbed other two stools and went away. It didn¡¯t take long he came back with another two mercenaries. He put a stool back near my table and sat on it.


    [-]: I brought one of stools back, old man.


    We were sitting face to face. Few minutes ago when he had come to ask for stools, I hadn¡¯t seen his face in details but right now I did see that they were not of a man of good standing and were looking at me with not good intentions either.


    [Me]: Thank you, young man. Though I told you I need only one and I am already sitting on it.


    Waiter brought two plates and put on table. One had steak, the other mashed potatoes.


    [Me]: Can you please bring me salt and pepper?


    Waiter nodded and went away while mercenary with sinister intentions told me.


    [-]: You seem like a rich man...


    [Me]: I¡¯m well off but not rich.


    [-]: Old man, we were fighting against beastmen on the north near Mount Retnus and now we were told to go to Hunter Valley to protect our lands from Elves.


    [Me]: Honourable deeds, young one.


    [-]: Its our duty, old man. Do you know what you duty is?


    [Me]: To wait...


    [-]: Wait for what?


    [Me]: For reaper to knock the door with its scythe. So it shall open and I may enter the realm of eternity where pain and suffering are no more.


    [-]: Fuck me! We got a philosopher in here with us. (another mercenary screamed so that the others could hear his words)


    Laughs roared around as their drunk friends began to smirk and chuckle at his words. Intoxicated they were, I did not understand exactly why they laughed, unfortunately they did.


    [-]: Old man did you not know that its not a good sign to talk about death in front of warriors of Kali clan who are going to war? How are you going to repay for your sins? Would you like see reaper earlier than you should?


    I took out a gold coin from my purse and put it infront of the mercenary. As gold coin was put on table, waiter came near me with two small saucer filled with salt and paper on it. Mercenary sitting in front of me was looking at gold coin. In an instant other mercenary who was standing besides my table smashed both his hands on table and moved closer to me. Less than 20 centimeters away from my head he was looking at me aggresively when waiter dropped saucer down and sounds of cracking echoed.


    [-]: Old man you disrespected us not once but twice. Just a gold coin? You want your sins to be washed of with just a gold coin? I¡¯m the champion in our group. You want to buy me with a gold coin? Haaa?


    [Me]: I have a better idea!


    [-]: What¡¯s that?


    My right hand moved instantly. I grabbed the guy by his neck. Pushing a bit forcefully I made sure that he could not breathe. His face got red in a moment. I smashed his face to table while still keeping hold of his head. His hands were moving right and left because of panicking. Second mercenary took out a knife when...


    [Me]: Calm down fellas. It¡¯s a restaurant not a battle zone. We are here to eat not to fight. Are we?


    [-]: Release him or...


    [Me] or Kali clan is going to punish me? Hahaa.. Kali is a tribe, not a clan boy. I have heard of misusing name of Kali tribe quite a few times in my lifetime. Nobody was punished because of that as it is not a crime. But threatening a Kali tribe elder by a mere group of mercenaries?!


    Other one was losing his breathe, I thought he is going to die. Releasing him I continued...


    [Me]: Take the coin, pay for everything that you had and keep the change!


    Next: Chapter 63 - Should I?</a>

 Chapter 63 - Should I?

    Sorry for late release, my hands were full of different things...


    NightinWolf''s fan-fiction recommendation... Red Eyes</a>


    *****************


    Chapter 63 ¨C Should I?


    I ate steak and mashed potatoes with great fulfillment. Enjoying my lunch to the fullest, I finished glass of wine, payed for my meal and exited restaurant.


    Myrim did not have potential to be a great city as Mehn or a hub city as it was almost on north-west border of kingdom.  In my view, only possible way for its expansion was to invite scientists from different regions to build a school for further research and development of new products and tools to be sold to households and guilds.  I talked to Krayon about my thoughts and he told me about his plans about future of Myrim, which inspired me in a positive manner. It was good to know about existence of people who were using their brains and assets to help out humanity, not just their pockets.


    Day after the next day, we met young Aslan outside Myrim. Krayon pretended as owner of sheep and cattle. We rode horses for twenty minutes before we reached place where herd was kept. There were few more experienced shephards who came with my young self to inspect some of the animals that were chosen for their health. Inspection ended quickly and we got our payment.  We left them back to Myrim.


    We were talking about local economy of Mehn, when an arrowhit Krayon¡¯s horse. Front legs of his horse bended down and Krayon fall of it. He was lucky because we were riding our horses slowly and after he fall off he didn¡¯t hurt himself badly. Few scratches. I bended my body and grabbed my horse¡¯s head as another arrow passed by me.


    Checking out surroundings my eyes detected mercenaries back from restaurant walking in fast pace towards us.


    [Me]: You alright?


    [Krayon]: Who are they?


    [Me]: I¡¯ll tell you later, now do not stand up¡­ Lay down as you are!


    I took out Ulfberht. He was still in a dagger form. Few more arrows were thrown at me so I changed my location to defect them and to keep Krayon away from being hurt more. I do not know why, but I could not sense any fear in my opponents. I think they were thinking that I was really old because of my appearance and overcoming on of their mates was a fluke.


    I played into their hands. I did not go full out instead made it to appear so that as if I was having hard time avoiding arrows. They began to close distance in between us faster. It¡¯s bad when hunter and prey change their places. It was wrong of them to follow their emotions and attack me again. I did not attack when distance was far thinking some of them could attack Krayon and keep him hostage so I played around a bit more.


    Pressing my right foot onto ground I took of with a speed of lightening. I have to applaud my first opponent as he was holding his sword with his both hands after moment of my disappearance from initial location. It took a few seconds for me to reach him. I slashed Ulfberht at his sword and it cut it into two. I used my left foot to step and used my right one to smash onto his right knee. His leg bended backwards, cracking into two. I did not waste another second and moved to second one. As I was taking my second step first foe began to scream horribly. We were away from Krayon far enough so I did not worry about him. Second one attacked me, though I assume he did know exact trajectory, which I was coming at him. Bending down I passed under his sword and unsheathed Ulfberht. He turned back to attack again but this time I grabbed his right arm and overforced him to fall down. I did not let go of his arm, moreover I put my foot on joint that brought together his shoulder and arm. Pulling his arm towards myself I dislocated his shoulder. There were 7 of them left. I could see horror in their eyes and faces.


    This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there.


    [Me]: I can continue the slaughter¡­ Or you guys can take your comrades and never ever come back to Myrim again.


    I waited for mercenaries to overcome shock of being beaten.


    [Me]: I take your silence as YES! Now, scream!


    I turned back and walked towards Krayon. He was no warrior or mage. Good man though not one with wits.


    [Krayon]: Who¡­Who¡­are they?


    [Me]: Nobody¡­ Lost lambs¡­ hahaa


    [Krayon]: You are good, Bartholomew.


    [Me]: Thanks. Get up¡­ We will walk to Myrim.


    At dawn I left Myrim to Mehn in a balloon ship. As always, I did best thing what I did while travelling in a balloon ship ¨C sleep.


    Jamelia and her son were running my business in my stead very well and my absence was not felt. Ricat informed me about new intelligence information that I missed during my trip. Halim¡¯s eyes were shut to realities as he was sitting on throne and thinking he holded absolute power. Corrupted to the core, he was not a fit person to rule the kingdom that is why a new king had to emerge. Gorn¡¯s attack would be a good chance and excellent situation to bring new balance of power into kingdom.


    I did have 2 more years until full out attack by Gorn so pretty much I was bored as life was meaningless to me because I was hiding myself and did not want to make a name and get myself known throughout the kingdom as Bartholomew. Keeping myself behind the curtains was hard but not impossible. ¡°The Guard¡± was an example to it.


    Sitting outside at backyard of bakery, I was under mulberry tree. Daydreaming about everything that had happened to me in last 12 years of my life, I came back to reality, as a gentle hand tapped on my shoulder.


    [Jamelia]: Hows life?


    [Me]: Boring¡­


    [Jamelia]: You know, I have never seen somebody who is as old as you and with lots of energy to waste¡­


    [Me]: Because most of us die at 25 and are buried at 75¡­ Life is to live.


    [Jamelia]: You are adventurous.


    [Me]: Maybe¡­


    [Jamelia]: Have you been on the other side of Kasp?


    She caught my attention¡­ I turned my face to look at her.


    [Jamelia]: Why don¡¯t you go to Land of Tats.


    [Me]: Should I?


    Next: Chapter 64 - Fate</a>

 Chapter 64 - Fate

    Chapter 64 ¨C Fate


    Two years has passed since I have left Mehn for traveling in and around the kingdom. I have gone through some hardships, met new people, learned about different local cultures and most important of all, I have made my decision about upcoming Gorn issue.


    As I was entering Myrim again after two years of travel, I saw similar face at the entrance. Krayon was going right and left in stress. I came up to him, ¡°Been long time, ey!¡± and he hugged me as if he had met someone dear to him after many years. ¡°Master Bartholomew, its an honor to meet you again after so much time¡± he talked and smiled simultaneously.


    During these past two years, I was sending out pigeons to Mehn or different regions regarding plans but I had never showed myself in front of ¡°The Guard¡± members. I was keeping myself away from everyone. A week ago, I sent a pigeon to Myrim for Krayon to meet me in front of Myrim¡¯s gates.


    Myrim had changed a lot since my last visit. City has grown into a metropolis, and big merchant guilds and companies have established their offices in city. I didn¡¯t learn much about its economical advance as it was not matter of importance to me right now. I stayed as Krayon¡¯s guest for a week and told him that I have to leave. ¡°You have to be ready, Krayon... Do not forget, dragon shall attack soon! We can not save everyone, but we have to do our best to save most of denizens of this city and surrounding villages. Stay true to our initial plans!¡± was my last words to him. I did not know if I will ever meet him again though everything may happen. What future holds for all of us is unknown.


    -----


    I was standing on top of hill from where I could see village shaman Hitomi¡¯s hut clearly. My young self now, almost 21 years old was going towards green mountainsides to feed his cattle and sheep. I watched him leaving until image of his herd disappeared out of my sight.


    For almost a month I lived in an old house which was not occupied by village people. In morning of 30th day of my stay, as sun lights were appearing out of east, I grabbed my fake beard and pulled it out. Watching it burn up and turn into dust I murmured ¡°It¡¯s time¡± to myself. Slowly I walked over to Hitomi¡¯s hut. As always she was already awake.


    [Hitomi]: Aslan aren¡¯t you supposed to be far away by your sheep and cattle?


    [Me]: There is an urgent situation that has come up and we gotta talk. Help me find village elder, I¡¯ll get Mariette and come up to his house... Wake every influential member in village and meet me there..


    She nodded in approval, got on Aiki and left away. I walked over to my house. Opening front door I entered into my home. It felt so nostalgic after so many years that for a while I was lost in thought and standing just besides the open door as if I was a frozen statue. ¡°Aslan, you are back¡± Mariette smiled and hugged me. ¡°Dear¡± I whispered, hugging her back. ¡°How¡¯s my health of¡±, I couldn¡¯t finish my question. Mariette put her right hand on top of her belly and spoke ¡°She is doing fine¡±. ¡°You mean he is doing fine¡± I cut in. ¡°We will now, when she is born¡± she replied. I told her that we have to join village elder in his house and  talk about a matter that is important to our village as our life and death depended on it. She was worried but I told her ¡°I¡¯ll protect you, that¡¯s I¡¯m back. Just be there with me to support¡±.


    It took us around half and hour to reach to village elder Taham¡¯s house. There were around 10 people, including Taham and Hitomi waiting for us. We entered into same hall that I was told that I earned my ticket to Mehn Academy long time ago. Mariette sat on chair while I stayed up and began to talk.


    [Me]: I have left my herd back in mountains and came back to tell that dragon has attacked few cities and most probably by now it is Mehn. Destroying it!


    I saw shock and despair filling everyone''s face as I gave them news of Gorn¡¯s appearance.


    [Me]: We can stay here and die. Or...


    Taham cut in.


    [Taham]: How we know that dragon has attacked any city at all?


    [Me]: I have no way to prove but waiting for it come over and attack us is absurd. There will be no way to protect ourselves or run away after it is knocking our doors.


    I looked at Mariette and her eyes were filled with uncertainty. I patted her shoulder to courage her. She smiled back at me.


    [Me]: There are two ways left. First is to stay and wait for our end. Second is to go to west. To forests..


    [Taham]: Elven forests? Are you crazy?


    [-]: If he is right, then that is most logical way out.


    [Taham]: Kars even you? Have you all gone crazy? We belong to mighty Kali tribe.. No one can...


    [Me]: I am not here to discuss things and lose time. Anyone who is interested, is welcome to come with me to east. I shall take my wife and mother with me and leave by tomorrow morning. I am going to go now, I will be at western entrance of village by sunrise tomorrow. Everyone who wishes to leave may join me.


    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    We had two horses mounted to our carriage, Mariette and my mother were sitting at back side while I was sitting on front of carriage to control horses. Almost half of our village was outside waiting for me.


    Hitomi was flying on her griffin over us. I stood up to address people who had decided to go to west with me.


    [Me]: Few years ago, I have met Elven princess and you shall be welcome to stay in elven forests until I return to pick you all up after dealing with dragon.


    Hooray! Shouts and claps of people could be hear from opposite side of village. Taham did not come with us, but he was at entrance cursing me.


    ¡°How you know Elven princess?¡± Mariette asked me while my mother had a laugh. ¡°I know many people, dear¡± I tried to evade but she insisted on a proper answer. ¡°You should ask her when you meet her¡± I swayed though now it was up to Alva to tell her whatever she felt...


    We reached Elven forests in almost two months of time. First to enter the forest, I was surrounded by elven bowmen. I asked them to me Alva, and they were shocked to see me knowing their princess. Alva had come to meet me with her father. I explained them situation which we faced and told her that I¡¯ll deal with dragon in less than a month and come back for my people. They agreed to host our people but no more than a month.


    I kissed Mariette on her forehead and my mother on her cheek, asking her to look after Mariette. I concentrated and mana began to flow out of my body, I chanted ¡°Inem apra!¡± and momentarily I was back in my village close to Hitomi¡¯s hut. Black smokes had covered sky over our village and everything was broken or burned down.


    Directly, I walked towards village center where I saw my young self talking few very old people who were alive after the catastrophe which our village faced. He ran to our house and I followed him from distance. He was in pain, and I knew exactly what he was going through. He disappeared and I knew where he had gone.


    Concentrating again and I whispered ¡°Inem apra!¡±. I appeared close to 1st bridge. Snow was pouring down from sky. My young self was surrounded by few warriors. I stayed away and observed them. They gave him food and water. Next morning they left and after an hour passed I found another horse and went after them.


    It took them close to month of travel time to reach place where Gorn was fighting Kimbra and two other demons. My young self activated spell for mana shield and went to fight dragon while other warriors besides him followed him.


    For a moment, I thought that I should join them and kill Gorn but if Gorn was killed then I should disappear to passed my mind. I stayed in distance to watch the battle. Gorn was very aggressive as it had reached its maximum size and was stronger than everyone else there.


    As its fire breathe reached young me, Kimbra and others, my young self grabbed Kimbra to protect her from flames though others were unfortunate. My young self threw Kimbra away and she fall down few meters in front of me unconscious. I crawled close to her and checked her pulse. Luckily she was alive.


    Hours passed as they fought each other. By now, my young self had cut down Gorn¡¯s wing. I checked Kimbra regularly, she was still unconscious and exhausted. When I checked Gorn and my young self, Gorn had already chanted some spell and magic circles were activated. Instantly, both of them disappeared.


    It was almost sunset. I walked over to place where both of them left this dimension to the other. Nothing was left. Magic circle was not visible anymore. I came back to see Kimbra still lying on ground. I sat besides her and took out water bottle and sipped few drops on her face. Slowly she opened her eyes. ¡°Did we make it?¡± she asked. ¡°Yes, Kimbra... We did.¡± I answered. ¡°I shall go now, though there is a new world to make and I shall need your help¡± I said and stood up. Concentrating again, I chanted same spell that I knew well ¡°Inem Apra!¡±.


    I appeared close to elven forest. Most of villagers were still living in tents. Sun had already set. I asked Ulfberht to turn to its sword form. He appeared in my hand and I went to center of tents where people had come together surrounding the fire. ¡°Aslan¡± Mariette screamed seeing me. She ran to me and hugged me. ¡°What happened?¡± she inquired in front of others. ¡°Dragon is no more in this world!¡±


    New world order was going to be made, and hopefully in this world I shall know what happiness is.


    *******************************


    I''m sorry for late update. I was planning to write 10 more chapters but because I''m writing another FF called Red Eyes </a> I did not want to prolong Wolf''s Cry anymore and finish it.


    Thank you all for your kind support. I hope it was to your hearts content.